Home

Model 17i - User Manual

Contents

1. Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 2 2 Model 17i and Converter Module Rear Panels ee ee ee ee ee ee ee EXTERNAL PUMP T ity P H kK GN a r N o EXTERNAL ie ACCESSORY vo EXPANSION 0 s aa 4 3 EI TE p A F au il ETHERNET DRY RITE ii i ya D power Fai gt 2 8 RELAY 2 23 F 3 i mera fo B S overrat L meurs Sif oun ANALOG 5 Q S L votase lS S E suru e JES 1 sored ki Q 4c soow T D Meur O XA D m J ziS Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument free of particulates It may be necessary to use the Teflon particulate filter as described in Teflon Particulate Filter on page 9 2 A Gas must be delivered to the instrument at atmospheric pressure It may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement as shown in Figure 2 3 if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure A Model 17 Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Setup Procedure lt Vent to Exhaust Line at Instrument Bulkhead Atmospheric Pressure a N lt _ Input Gas Line Figure 2 3 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing 2 Connect the air dryer to the DRY AIR bulkhead of the analyzer module 3 Connect the pump vacuum port inlet stainless steel fitting to the EXHAUST bulkhead Fi
2. Command Description Page nox Reports current NO concentration B 12 nox bkg Reports sets current NO background B 31 nox cal gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 nox coef Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 nox gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 nt Reports current N concentration B 12 nt cal gas Reports sets N span gas concentration B 30 nt coef Reports sets current N coefficient B 29 ozonator Reports sets ozonator on or off B 39 ozonator flow Reports current ozonator flow B 39 ozonator safety Reports sets ozonator safety on or off B 39 ozonator status Reports status of ozonator and safety B 40 pmt status Reports sets PMT status on or off B 40 pmt supply Sets the PMT on or off B 40 pmt temp Reports temperature of the PMT cooler same as cooler B 14 temperature pmt voltage Reports current PMT voltage B 14 power up mode Reports sets the power up mode which configures the B 45 instrument to power up in either the local unlocked mode or the remote locked mode pres Reports current reaction chamber pressure B 14 pres comp pc Reports sets pressure compensation on or off B 37 program no Reports analyzer program number B 46 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 31 range mode Reports sets current range mode B 35 range nh3 Reports sets current NH range B 33 range no Reports sets current NO range B 33 range no2 Reports sets current NO range B 33
3. cccecececesceteteeeteteeseees 2 4 Figure 2 4 Twin Head Vacuum Pump Installation ccc te teteeeeee 2 5 Figure 2 5 1 0 Terminal Board Views c cccccccccsccscssestesestesesteesteseeteseeeeneeees 2 7 Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board VieWS 0 c cccccccccecescesesceestetesteseetseeeeneeess 2 8 Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board ViQWS c cccccccscecescsescetesesescetesesesteteseseees 2 9 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display ccc ceccescsesceceescseeceseseseeceseseseateneseseees 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel PUSHDUttONS 0 ccc ccc ce ces eseecetesesesteeseseeteneseseees 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Software ccccccccccceceseseesceteeeeeeee 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode 3 9 Figure 3 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode 3 10 Figure 3 6 Analog Output in Auto Range Mode cccccccceecceeseeesteeeteeee 3 11 Figure 3 7 Pin Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode cccc0 3 12 Figure 4 1 GPT System c cccccccccccccececesssceseeesesssessesestesesteseeteseetessetsseaeeneaess 4 3 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries 0 0 cece 5 3 Figure 5 2 Inspecting and Replacing the Converter Capillaries 0 000 5 5 Figure 5 3 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters cccececececeteeeeneeee 5 7 Figure 5 4 Rebuilding the PUMP ccc ceesesceceeseseeceseseseeteseseseatenesesee
4. Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board Transfomer Solenoids 4 Figure 8 1 Analyzer Module Hardware Components 8 2 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Heated Capillarly Holders 3 System Description NO2 to NO Converter NH Converter Converter Temperature Control Board NO to NO Converter Mode Solenoid NH Converter Thermo Fisher Scientific Converter Interface Board Transformer Ammonia Scrubbers 3 Figure 8 2 Converter Module Hardware Components The NO2 to NO converter heats molybdenum to approximately 325 C in order to convert and detect NO2 The converter consists of an insulated housing heater replaceable cartridge and a type K thermocouple sensor The mode solenoid valve switches analyzer operation between the NO mode and NO mode It routes the ambient air sample either through the reaction chamber NO mode or through the NO2 to NO converter and then to the reaction chamber NO mode The NH converter heats stainless steel to approximately 750 C in order to convert and detect NH3 The converter consists of an insulated housing ceramic heater replaceable cartridge and a type K thermocouple sensor Model 17 Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Reaction Chamber Reaction Chamber Optical Filter Pressure Transducer Sample Flow Sensor Ozonator Ozonator Flow Switch Photomultiplier Tube Photomultiplier Tub
5. after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm DH pikari E ES r EA Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings EH Guided Piim Erei i Logic State The Logic State screen is used to change the I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open 3 44 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu and closes to trigger the digital input action If nothing is connected to the digital input pin the state should be left at open to prevent the action from being triggered e Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed Wi mid ER En CH ee Bet Ebb Eesi Rly ini Bs EEE TE Sanat Bone TOP Fane Bost ae 5 PME hae EEN EE Instrument Action The Instrument Action screen allows the user to choose the instrument action that is tied to the selected digital input e Inthe M
6. EXHAUST J A INLET NOL a roe Figure 7 5 Replacing the Pump 2 Remove both inlet and exhaust lines from the pump 3 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedures to replace the diaphragm and valve for the vacuum pumps Figure 7 6 Equipment Required e Allen wrench 4 mm e Nut driver 7 32 inch or 5 5 mm e Allen wrench 3 mm e Spanner wrench 3 8 mm diameter by 4 5 mm long inserts e Small flat blade screwdriver e Large flat blade screwdriver e Cleaning agent alcohol e Fine grade steel wool e LOC TITE blue breakable thread adhesive Thermo Fisher Scientific A Diaphragm Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Use the following procedure to replace the diaphragm Figure 7 6 1 Undo the four socket head cap screws and washers C for each head and lift off the heads with tubing from the pump body Keep the heads connected if at all possible disconnecting and then reconnecting the PTFE tube can cause leaks 2 Check for smooth opening and closing of the reed valves Q a number of sets of diaphragms can be replaced before there is a need to rep
7. Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate The example below sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok dhcp This command reports the current state of use of DHCP on or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the analyzer automatically The example below shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff These commands enables and disables the DHCP service by either on or off Changes to this parameter will only take effect when the analyzer is powered up The example below sets the DHCP service on Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note When DHCP is set to on the user supplied addr gw addr dns addr ip and addr nm parameters are not used A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The example below shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 9 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 9 The example below sets the reply term
8. lt _ _ 1 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 23 Rear Panel Board Connectors Dig ital Outp ut Board Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Digital output board 7 46 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Motherboard Replacement Nut driver 3 16 inch f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard 4 Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 23 5 Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove the board 6 To install the digital output board follow previous steps in reverse Motherboard Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 22 Replaceme nt Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component
9. Captive Screws 4 gt dp a A ol Figure 7 13 NH Converter Heater Core Assembly 9 To replace converter follow previous steps in reverse i Use the following procedure to replace a solenoid valve Figure 7 14 Solenoid Valve he following proced pl lenoid valve Fig 4 Replaceme nt Equipment Required Solenoid valve Wrench 5 16 inch Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect solenoid from the Measurement Interface board NO NO connector Note electrical connections to facilitate re connection Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing Ozonator Assembly Replacement Remove plumbing from solenoid Note plumbing connections to facilitate re connection Pull solenoid valve from mounting clip To replace solenoid follow previous steps in reverse Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Solenoid Valve SS PR fa Mounting Clip gt J j e Figure 7 14 Replacing the Solenoid Valve Ozonato
10. Figure 7 3 Converter Module Component Layout Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel Removing the The measurement bench can be removed and the partition panel can be Measurement Bench lowered to improve access to connectors and components This applies to both the analyzer module and the converter module Refer to the following and Lowe ring the steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Figure 7 4 Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS Zp SLIDE BENCH OUT Pass Through Connectors Loosen Captive Partition Panel Remove Screw s id Remove Hidden Screw LOWER PANEL Figure 7 4 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 7 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Replacement 1 Turn analyzer and converter OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Remove the cover 4 In the analyzer disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel and connect to the measurement interface bo
11. Input Channel Pin 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 9 8 10 Ground 4 8 11 14 Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Analog Output Calibration Analog Output Calibration 7 36 Model 17 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Analog Output Calibration gt and press 4 The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal screen press _ _ to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale A 5 Use t until the meter reads the value shown in th
12. RS485 to Expansion Board RS485 to Expansion Board SPARE DATA J4 mo N ono wo A WO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Spare Board RS485 to Spare Board 0 6 12 Model 17 Instruction Manual J5 on FP WO N Power Fail Relay N C Contact Ground TTL Input 1 TTL Input 2 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Reference Pin Label Designator oOo co wn Om gt a oO a a a X co oo N o o Ae ow N wo Wo Wo wa w aa a a L DN a NY DN NY NY NY KM a YN Oo nO FP WO N FF O DO DOAN DOD OO A OO N gt O Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description TTL Input 5 TTL Input 7 TTL Input 8 TTL Input 10 Ground TTL Input 13 TTL Input 15 Ground Analog Voltage Output 1 Analog Voltage Output 3 Ground Analog Voltage Output 5 Ground Ground Power Fail Relay COM Power Fail Relay N O Contact Ground TTL Input 3 TTL Input 4 TTL Input 6 Ground TTL Input 9 TTL Input 11 TTL Input 12 TTL Input 14 TTL Input 16 Ground Analog Voltage Output 2 Analog Voltage Output 4 Ground Analog Voltage Output 6 Ground SER EN J7 N Serial Enable Jumper 3 3V Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 14 Model 17 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description 24V IN J10 N 24V Ground
13. Servicing Input Board Replacement Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect the coaxial cable with BNC connector and the ribbon cable 3 Loosen the two screws holding the assembly bracket to the floor plate move the assembly towards the rear and lift the assembly off the screws 4 Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the assembly bracket and lift the input box off the screws Assembly Bracket Input Board Input Board Screws 4 Input Box Screws 2 Input Box Assembly Bracket Screws 2 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Input Board 5 Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse 6 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Input Board Calibration Input Board Calibration A DC Power Supply Replacement 7 32 Model 17i Instruction Manual 7 Perform an input board calibration See the Input Board Calibration procedure that follows Afte
14. chapter 5 Connect the calibration gas and allow the instrument to sample calibration gas until the reading stabilizes 6 From the Main Menu press _ to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to PMT Voltage Adjustment gt and press The Set PMT Voltage screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 7 At the Set PMT Voltage screen use to increment decrement the counts until the instrument displays the calibration gas concentration value Use the following procedure to clean or remove the reaction chamber see Figure 7 11 Equipment Required Allen Wrench 9 64 inch Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove PMT cooler as described in PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement in this chapter 2 Disconnect all plumbing connections from the reaction chamber 3 Remove the three socket head screws fastening front of reaction chamber to rear Figure 7 11 This exposes the inner surfaces of both Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal sections of the reaction chamber and the quartz window To clean these surfaces use cotton swabs and
15. 6 SPAN MODE 7 NO MODE 8 NOx MODE 9 Nt MODE 10 NOT USED 11 GEN ALARM 12 NO CONC MAX ALARM Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 13 NO CONC MIN ALARM 14 N02 CONC MAX ALARM 15 NO2 CONC MIN ALARM 16 NOx CONC MAX ALARM 17 NOx CONC MIN ALARM 18 NH3 CONC MAX ALARM 19 NH3 CONC MIN ALARM 20 Nt CONC MAX ALARM 21 Nt CONC MIN ALARM 22 INTERNAL TEMP ALARM 23 CHAMBER TEMP ALARM 24 COOLER TEMP ALARM 25 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP ALARM 26 EXTERNAL CONVERTER TEMP ALARM 27 NOT USED 28 PRESSURE ALARM 29 FLOW ALARM 30 OZONE FLOW ALARM 31 MOTHERBOARD STATUS ALARM 32 INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM 33 1 0 EXP BD STATUS ALARM 34 NOT USED 35 CONC ALARM 36 SAMPLE MODE 37 PURGE MODE 38 EXTERNAL CONVERTER STATUS 39 ZERO CHECK CAL ALARM 40 SPAN CHECK CAL ALARM Table C 2 Read Registers for 17i Register Number Variable 40001 amp 40002 NO 40003 amp 40004 N02 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual Register Number Variable 40005 amp 40006 NOx 40007 amp 40008 NH3 40009 amp 40010 Nt 40011 amp 40012 LOW NO 40013 amp 40014 LOW N02 40015 amp 40016 LOW NOx 40017 amp 40018 LOW
16. GURNEE CHA EH ee e POPE TE Sanat Faoss ETET Aad a ii Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is a selection of 8 analog input channels to calibrate and allows the user to select the calibration action zero or span The analog input calibration is visible only when the I O expansion board is installed and the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration Wi Thy ea a A pe a Ph Fm PP PP LOR Pu bed Fil rea fe aT Bb EE hee UHR EE w EURE TE eet faee Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Zero Hook up a voltage source of 0 V to the analog input channel Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Service Menu Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale Ozonator Safety Extended Ranges 3 82 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Analog Input Calibration Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibra
17. NO Soda Lime 6 12 mesh Purafil Hydrocarbons Molecular Sieve 4A Activated Charcoal 0 and S02 Activated Charcoal 4 2 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Phase Titrator Flow Controllers Pressure Regulator ZERO AIR Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required A gas phase titrator GPT such as is included in the Thermo Scientific Model 146 Series Multigas Calibration System is used to generate NO2 concentrations from NO concentrations Figure 4 1 shows the suggested placement of the component parts of a gas phase titration apparatus Equipment Damage All connections between components in the system should be made with glass Teflon or other non reactive material A The zero air flow controllers should be devices capable of maintaining constant airflows within 2 of the required flow rate The NO flow controller should be capable of maintaining constant NO flows within 2 of the required flow rate The pressure regulator for the standard NO cylinder must have a non reactive diaphragm and internal parts and a suitable delivery pressure F C FLOW CONTROLLER F M FLOW METER F C Fp MIXING CHAMBER Figure 4 1 GPT System Model 17 Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Equipment Required Ozone Generator Diverter Valve Reaction Chamber Mixing Chamber Output Manifold Reagents NO Concentration Standard 4 4 Model 177 Instruction Manual
18. The Converter Temperature screen displays the current converter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 300 to 1000 C The actual alarm setpoints should be set for the installed converter If the converter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Converter Temp The Minimum Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum converter temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum converter temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Converter Temp gt Min or Max Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Alarms Menu 3 66 External Converter Temperature Min and Max External Converter Temperature Limits Model 17 Instruction Manual ip priori Piet The External Converter Temperature screen displays the current external converter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 300 to 1000 C The actual alarm setpoints should be set for the installed converter If the external converter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Ext Converter Te
19. e Abbreviations Used on page D 2 e Basic Command Structure on page D 2 e Block Checksum on page D 3 e Geysitech Commands on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support Geysitech protocol Number of Data bits 8 Number of Stop bits 1 Parity None Data rate from 1200 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 177 Instruction Manual D 1 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 177 Instruction Manual iSeries Instruments support the Geysitech TCP protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface TCP connection port for Geysitech 9882 The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g Instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The instrument Address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The Instrument Address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this docu
20. procedure Backgrounds to Zero described previously in Calibration Calibrate Low NO NO andN 2 Follow the Calibrate NO NO and N procedure described previously in Calibration selecting Cal Lo NO Coeficient to calibrate the low NO channel to the low NO calibration gas Cal Lo NOx Coefficient to calibrate the low NO channel to the low NO calibration gas and Cal Lo Nt Coefficient to calibrate the low N channel to the low N calibration gas Calibrate Low NO 3 Follow the Calibrate NO2 procedure described previously in Calibration selecting Cal Lo NO2 Coefficient to calibrate the low NO channel to the low NO calibration gas Calibrate Low NH 4 Follow the Calibrate NH3 procedure described previously in Calibration selecting Cal Lo NH3 Coefficient to calibrate the low NH channel to the low NH calibration gas Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 4 17 Calibration Zero and Span Check Calibrate High NO NO and N Calibrate High NO Calibrate High NH Zero and Span Check 4 18 Model 17 Instruction Manual 5 Follow the Calibrate NO NO and N procedure described previously in Calibration selecting Cal Hi NO Coeficient to calibrate the high NO channel to the high NO calibration gas Cal Hi NOx Coefficient to calibrate the high NO channel to the high NO calibration gas and Cal Hi Nt Coefficient to calibrate the high N channel to the high N cal
21. vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROD
22. 1 Resistor WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Thermo Fisher Scientific Fuse Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Fuse Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermistor plugged into the measurement interface board to a calibrated thermometer Figure 7 2 Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a value of 10K ohms at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10K resistor to the thermistor input AMB TEMP on the measurement interface board and enter the temperature reading A A 1 C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable a 3 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt press 4 j gt to scroll to Temperature Calibration gt and press e The Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return t
23. 3 Press gt to return to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 177 major subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 and Figure 7 3 to identify the component location Table 7 1 Model 17i Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Part Number Description 101491 19 Processor Board 100533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board Optional 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel Display 101399 00 Analyzer Transformer 220 240VAC Optional 103813 00 Converter Transformer 220 240VAC Optional 101863 00 Analyzer Transformer 100VAC Optional 100536 00 Measurement Interface Board 100856 00 Temperature Control Board Molybdenum Converter 103729 00 Temperature Control Board N Converter 101167 00 Input Board Assembly 9973 Ozonator Assembly 101419 00 Ozonator Transformer 101023 00 Pressure Transducer 101021 00 Flow Transducer Sample 101620 00 Flow Switch Ozone 9367 Photomultiplier Tube PMT 101024 00 PMT High Voltage Power Supply 101324 00 PMT Base Socket Assembly 101390 00 Solenoid Valve 101020 00 Cooler Assembly 02648 05 Reaction Chamber Assembly 101009 00 NO to NO Converter Assembly
24. A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 47 Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement 7 48 Measurement Interface Board Replacement Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection 5 Using the nut driver remove the eight standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 23 6 Pop off the motherboard from motherboard support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 24 Equipment Required Measurement interface board Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component amp 1 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next s
25. C Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermistor The NH converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple signal and fed back to the converter processor to be used to display and control the NH converter temperature The temperature control board receives control signals from the converter processor software to control the converter heater to the desired set point Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults The PMT power supply produces high voltage to operate the photomultiplier tube used in the measurement system The output voltage is adjustable from approximately 600 to 1200 volts under software control The input board accepts the current signal from the PMT and converts it to a voltage which is scaled by a factor of approximately 1 10 or 100 depending on the full scale range of the NO channel The scaled voltage signal is converted to a frequency and sent to the microprocessor The input board includes a test signal that can be activated under software control The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in parallel with the PMT input This allows the input board and the connection to the processor system to be tested and calibrated without using the PMT The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear pa
26. DIGITAL OUTPUT J gt Oo O N O O gt wo N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock EXT RS485 J15 oOo a N oon A WW N a a a a a ol A ow N RS485 to Rear Panel RS485 to Rear Pane 5V 5V 5V Ground Ground Ground NC NC 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24 MONITOR J17 24V Power Monitor Ground FRONT PANEL BD J18 Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 LLP LCD Signal 7 LFLM LCD Signal 8 LD4 LCD Signal 9 LDO LCD Signal 10 LD5 LCD Signal 11 LD1 LCD Signal 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltage 17 5V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V RS232 RS485 A P1 A 1 NC wo N Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT Model 177 Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designato
27. External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 102562 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6219 Cable RS 232 optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard with all instruments 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard with all instruments 103084 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M optional Included with optional I O Expansion Board in all instruments Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing External Device Connection Components Converter Flow Reaction Transducer Chamber PMT Assembly ow Switch Temperature Control Board Capillary Pressure Transducer Input Board HVPS Fan Thermistor Measurement Interface Board 1 0 Expansion zim Board Opt Power Supply Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board Transfomer Solenoids 4 Figure 7 2 Analyzer Module Component Layout 7 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components NH Converter Converter Temperature Control Board Heated Capillarly Holders 3 Converter Interface Board Transformer Ammonia Scrubbers 3
28. Figure 9 2 Rack Mount Option Assembly c cccccccccccccceecesestesestesteeeteeeees 9 5 Figure 9 3 Bench Mounting cccecccccceceesestesesesescetesesesteseseseeceesesesteeseseaes 9 6 Figure 9 4 EIA Rack Mounting c ccc cecccscecesesescetesesestesesesesteeseseeteeseseaes 9 7 Figure 9 5 Retrofit Rack MOUNTING 0 cccccccecesesescetesesesteesesesteeseseeteeseseaes 9 8 Figure B1 Flag Sinn cuits ae eta ed ated ere aos B 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 177 Specifications 2 ceccecccccccssestesessesestesesteseeesesteseeeeees 1 3 Table 2 1 O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ccccccccccecesteesteesteseeteees 2 7 Table 2 2 D O Terminal Board Pin DeScriptions 0 cccccccccccccstesesteeeteeeeees 2 8 Table 2 3 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin DeSCriptiOnSs ccccceceesceceteeeeeteees 2 9 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons 0 0 eee eee eceeeeeseeesteseseeseseeseseeseseeneees 3 3 Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode c ccceceeeeee 3 9 Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode 0 c ccc 3 10 Table 3 4 Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode ccccccceeeee 3 12 Table 3 5 Standard anges ss seo ee a to es He 3 14 Table 3 6 Extended Ranges 0 ccccccecccscesesesescetesesesesesteesesesteteseseeeeesees 3 15 Table 3 7 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table ccccccccceceeceeeteeeeee 3 4
29. HI Ni Zero 0 Range Setting Range Changing the setting for this output is not recommended Internal Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Chamber Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Cooler Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value NO Converter Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value External Converter Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Chamber Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Model 177 Instruction Manual Operation Instrument Controls Menu Output Zero Value Full Scale 100 Value PMT Volts 700 volts 1100 volts Ozonator Flow User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Capillary Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Everything Else 0 Units 10 Units Choose Signal to Output The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices Group choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed This allows the user to select the output signal to the selected output channel In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range is visible only in auto range mode The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 8 below for a list of items for each signal group choice Not
30. Molybdenum 110VAC 9269 Molybdenum Converter Core Assembly 114449 00 NH Converter Heater Assembly 10155 NH Converter Core Assembly 101011 00 Pump 100VAC w Plate and Fittings 9267 Pump Repair Kit for 101011 00 9456 Pump 115VAC 60Hz 8079 Pump 115VAC 50Hz 9457 Pump 220VAC 50Hz 8500 Pump 220VAC 60Hz Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Part Number Description 8080 Pump 100VAC 50 60Hz 9464 Pump Repair Kit 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24VDC w Base Plate and Screws 100907 00 Fan 24VDC 8630 Fan Filter 101905 00 Fuse 250VAC 4 0 Amp SlowBlow for 100VAC and 110VAC analyzer models 101904 00 Fuse 250VAC 2 0 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC analyzer models 103955 00 Fuse 250VAC 7 0 Amp SlowBlow for 100VAC and 110VAC converter models 103894 00 Fuse 250VAC 3 15 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC converter models 103246 00 Converter Capillary Heater Thermistor Assembly 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor 01680 00 Ammonia Scrubber 101016 00 Ozone Cleanser Option 0169 Ceramic Heater Converter Module 4119 Capillary 0 008 inch ID 4121 Capillary 0 01 inch ID 9212 Capillary O Ring 6556 Optical Filter Kit Red Filter Quartz Window Rubber Washer 6998 Desiccant Drierite Cable List Table 7 2 describes the Model 17 cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagram
31. NH and N span coefficients are usually calculated by the instrument processor during calibration The span coefficients are used to correct the NO NO2 NO NH3 and N readings The NO NO and N span coefficients normally has a value near 1 000 The NO span coefficient normally has a value between 0 95 and 1 050 It should be noted that the NO span coefficient has two coefficient values NO2 COEF 1 is the NO span coefficient factor for the low temperature converter while NO2 COEF 2 is the NO span factor coefficient for the high temperature converter The normal values are near 1 000 The NO NO NO NH3 and N Coefficient screens allow the NO NO NO NH and N span coefficients to be manually changed while sampling span gas of known concentration The NO NO NO NH3 and N Coefficient screens operate the same way Therefore the following description of the NO coefficient screen applies to the NO2 NOx NH3 and N coefficient screens as well The display shows the current NO concentration reading The next line of the display shows the NO span coefficient that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the NO concentration Notice that as the span coefficient value is changed the current NO concentration reading on the above line also changes However no real changes are made to the value stored in memory until is pressed Only proposed changes as indicated by a question mark prompt are displayed u
32. NO impurity are given in USEPA Publication No EPA 600 4 75 003 Technical Assistance Document for the Chemiluminescence Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide Thermo Fisher Scientific Assaying a Working NO Standard Against a NIST traceable NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Standard Calibration Equipment Required In addition the procedure for the certification of a NO working standard against an NIST traceable NO standard and determination of the amount of NO impurity in the working standard is reproduced here The cylinder should be re certified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality control program Use the NIST traceable NO standard and the GPT calibration procedure to calibrate the NO NO and NO responses of the instrument Also determine the converter efficiency of the analyzer Refer to the calibration procedure in this manual and in the United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 50 Appendix F for exact details Ignore the recommended zero offset adjustments Use the following procedure to calculate the NO concentration standard and NO impurity 1 Generate several NO concentrations by dilution of the NO working standard 2 Use the nominal NO concentration NO nom to calculate the diluted concentrations 3 Plot the analyzer NO response in ppm versus the nominal diluted NO concentration and determine the slope Snom 4 Calculate the NO concentration of the working standard
33. Use _ to move the cursor left and right and use t to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor d Press to calculate and save the new N coefficient based on the entered span concentration The exact N concentration is calculated from Fyo X NO stp NO limp Ni lovr Fro Fo Fp Where Model 177 Instruction Manual 4 13 Calibration Calibration Calibrate NO 4 14 Model 17 Instruction Manual 5 N our diluted N concentration at the output manifold ppm NO imp concentration of NO impurity in the standard NO cylinder ppm The N recorder response will equal N Jour Recorder Response scale x 100 ecg Zn Where e URL Nominal upper range limit of the N channel ppm Record the N concentration and the analyzer s N response Calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas a Disconnect the source of NO from the converter module In its place connect a source of NO2 A known calibration source NO is required to measure the NO conversion efficiency of the converters in the Model 172 as well as calibrate the NO channel of the analyzer Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O to produce a decrease in the low NO concentration equivalent to about 80 of the URL of the low NO range The decrease must not exceed 90 of the low NO concentration determined in the Calibrate Low NO
34. calibrated separately This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another For example the low NH range is set to 0 50 ppb and the high NH range is set to 0 20 000 ppb NHz Concentratior 500 ppb NHz Analog Output 5V NHz Status Output Figure 3 6 Analog Output in Auto Range Mode Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Range Menu By default in the auto range mode the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 7 See Table 3 4 for channels and pin connections Auto range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 72 000000000000000000 0000000000000000 000 Figure 3 7 Pin Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode Table 3 4 Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 NO Analog Output 2 33 3 Range Status half scale high range zero scale low range 3 15 5 NH Analog Output 4 34 7 Range Status half scale high range zero scale low range 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A 3 12 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Units NO NO2 NOx NH and N Ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific
35. chapter A 1 Turn instrument off unplug the power cords from the analyzer converter and pump and disconnect the pump plumbing from the instrument 2 Note the orientation of the pump head top plate for later reassembly Using a 3 mm Allen wrench remove the eight socket head screws and washers securing the pump head top plate Model 17 Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 5 8 Model 177 Instruction Manual Discard the old Teflon gasket Note the orientation of the diaphragm head for later reassembly Remove the diaphragm head Using a 4 mm Allen wrench remove the four socket head screws securing the diaphragm head to the pump body Insert the tips of blunt needlenose pliers in the dimples of the clamping disk then loosen and remove the clamping disk Remove and discard the old Teflon gasket Insert the clamping disk into the new Teflon diaphragm three pieces and screw the clamping disk into the pump Do not over tighten Remove the screw and nut securing the flapper valves and remove and discard old flapper valves Install the new flapper check that the screw head and not the washer is on the smooth side of the pump and check that the flappers are completely flat and straight 10 Align the diaphragm head correctly as noted in Step 2 and secure with 11 12 T3 14 the four socket head screws Place the new Teflon gasket over the pump head so that the eight screws
36. concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus use _ and to move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons fe Celi fe Ce a ae 2 a E3 D Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function Soft Keys The e soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below gt Run The gt is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the NO NO2 NO NHs and N concentrations Menu The is used to display the Main Menu when in the R
37. e Ethernet Communications Model 17 Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description Electronics Internal Connectors Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors Converter Interface 8 8 Model 177 Instruction Manual Board e I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors include e Function key panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board Data e I O Expansion Board Data e Digital Output Board e AC distribution The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Connectors located on the measurement interface board include e Data communication with the motherboard e 24V and 120VAC power supply inputs e Fans and solenoid outputs e Cooler control e 120VAC outputs for the pump and temperature control board e Ozonator e Flow and pressure sensors e Ambient temperature sensor e Temperature control board e PMT high voltage supply e Measurement input board The converter interface board serves as a central connection area for all electronics in the converter It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the external NH conver
38. procedure Allow the analyzer to sample the known NO concentration until the NO NO NOx NHs and N responses stabilize When the responses stabilize from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO2 Coefficient The NO field displays the current NO concentration The NO2 Span Conc field is where you enter the NO calibration gas concentration Set the NO calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the NO concentration generated by GPT and any NO impurity Use _ to move the cursor left and right and use t to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration The exact NO concentration is calculated from Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate NH 6 Calibration Calibration Fno X NO gt limp Fno Fo Fp NO lour INO Joro INO Irem Where NOz our diluted NO concentration at the output manifold ppm NO oric original NO concentration prior to addition of O3 ppm NO rem NO concentration remaining after addition of O3 ppm The NO recorder response will equal Recorder Response scale Ooo x 100 Zyo Where URL Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel ppm g Record the NO concentration and the analyzer s NO response The analyzer does a single point efficiency calculation corrects the NO3 reading for co
39. set date 12 01 04 Receive set date 12 01 04 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Send set default params Receive set default params ok ozonator This command reports the ozonator is on or off The example below reports that the ozonator is on Send ozonator Receive ozonator on set ozonator onoff These commands set the ozonator on or off The example below sets the ozonator off Send set ozonator off Receive set ozonator off ok ozonator flow This command reports the current ozonator flow The example below reports that the current ozonator flow is 0 050 LPM Send ozonator flow Receive ozonator flow 0 050 1 m ozonator safety This command reports the status of the ozonator safety on or off The example below reports that the ozonator safety is on Send ozonator safety Receive ozonator safety on Model 17 Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 40 Model 17 Instruction Manual set ozonator safety onoff These commands set the ozonator safety on or off The example below sets the ozonator safety off Send set ozonator safety off Receive set ozonator safety off ok ozonator status This command reports the status of the ozonator and safety The example below reports that the ozonator is off Send ozonator status Receive ozonator status off pmt status pmt Th
40. sscseceseeseseseeneeseeeeneeeees B 52 Format Specifier for EREC Layout icicacvecd anes noovlsnets veziactdeceseusenente B 52 Terte e tate ts teen daanstets Suascan a e a B 52 Malie CPU fla escalate as lg Al aang a taal S B 53 NVR GUNG cas shoe ea Eh cet ae De eaten Tk StS OO B 53 Alarm Miron gti Oise ect is ona olka ee oe kd a ice aad tek B 53 Translation sl ALG Seg uttsd co lurtccoahi tat a teenies secactiiysaueals B 53 Selection Table sena te ae as tet aa cdl eek ae AAEE B 53 Button Designate ricecsisss essed bsnses tea ii B 54 MEAN Sat este eda 2h tes deca eect E aad B 54 MODBUS Protocol op rsscciicinsstcncctnwiatackiniesnthandanteencians C 1 Serial Communication Patainete ts 3 25 cadences usiceea tis asecacnastinaaks C 1 TCP Communication Parameters 22 00 cadet ua veunaeasomtaniaecn C 2 Application Data Unit Detinitionn5 4425 nseaeth eae C 2 Slave del bes ecisteewt atanttut ial Cag tar a actus a a Ae ds oe C 2 INAO YATE Plead L EAE EE E E N E AA C 2 Function Ge 6161 opps ee nnn nT n a A A E C 3 Dataren late RO AAA Cah abel Oe Peto Neate te AO cecee came Iay C 3 Error Check rennan an a E Mee eee eae es C 3 F ncton Codes oie ete tones anaa n A a NS C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs eesesseeeeseeseeeseeeeneeaees C3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Coil 2 esteoc ccenerten tee latecucce once C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported w2 cets ake ca ones aka ieee C 8 Geysit
41. t wrong settings The example below reports that the NO full scale range is set to 50 ppb according to Table B 6 and Table B 7 Send Receive range no range no 0 5 000E 01 ppb set range no selection set high range nh3 selection set range no2 selection set high range nt selection set range nox selection set low range no selection set range nh3 selection set low range no2 selection set range nt selection set low range nox selection set high range no selection set low range nh3 selection set high range no2selection set low range nt selection set high range nox selection These commands select the NO NO2 NOx NH3 and N full scale ranges according to Table B 6 and Table B 7 The example below sets the NO full scale range to 2 000 ppb Model 17 Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 34 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send Receive set range no 5 set range no 5 Table B 6 Standard Ranges ok Selection ppb ppm pgm mgm 0 50 0 05 100 0 1 1 100 0 10 200 0 2 2 200 0 20 500 0 5 3 500 0 50 1 000 1 0 4 1 000 1 00 2 000 2 0 5 2 000 2 00 5 000 5 0 6 5 000 5 00 10 000 10 0 7 10 000 10 00 20 000 20 0 8 20 000 20 00 30 000 30 0 9 C1 C1 C1 C1 10 C2 C2 C2 C2 11 C3 C3 C3 C3 Table B 7 Extended Ranges Selection ppb ppm pgm mgm 0 200 0 2 500 0 5 1 500 0 5 1 000 1 2 1 000 1 2 000 2 3 2 000 2 5 000 5 4 5 000 5 10
42. 000 10 5 10 000 10 20 000 20 6 20 000 20 50 000 50 7 50 000 50 100 000 100 8 100 000 100 150 000 150 9 C1 C1 C1 C1 10 C2 C2 C2 C2 11 C3 C3 C3 C3 custom range range 1 2 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1 2 or 3 The example below reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5 50 ppb Send custom 1 Receive custom 1 550E 01 ppb set custom range range value set custom 1 value set custom 2 value set custom 3 value set custom 1 range value set custom 2 range value set custom 3 range value These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1 2 or 3 to range value where value is a floating point number representing concentration in ppb ppm pg m or mg m The example below sets the custom 1 range to 55 5 ppb Send set custom 1 range 55 5 Receive set custom 1 range 55 5 ok range mode This command reports the current range mode Send range mode Receive range mode single set range mode mode This command sets the current range mode to single dual or auto The example below sets the range mode to single Send set range mode single Receive set range mode single ok gas mode gas This command reports the current mode of sample zero or span The example below reports that the gas mode is sample Send gas mode Receive gas
43. 31 er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 22 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 22 in the format specified in the command erec format Reports sets erec format ASCII or binary B 24 erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 24 flags Reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the B 14 status of the ozonator PMT gas mode and alarms flow Reports current measured sample flow in LPM B 13 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 43 gas Reports sets zero span valves to sample zero or span mode B 35 gas mode Reports current mode of sample zero or span B 35 gas unit gu Reports sets current gas units B 36 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 31 high avg time Reports sets high range averaging time B 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page high coef 1 no2 Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 high coef 2 no2 Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 high nh3 Reports NH concentration calculated with high range B 12 coefficients high nh3 coef Reports sets high range NH coefficients B 29 high nh3 gas Reports sets high range NHs span gas concentration B 30 high no Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B 12 coefficients
44. 9 2 e Ozone Particulate Filter on page 9 2 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 2 e 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly on page 9 2 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 3 e Cables on page 9 3 e Mounting Options on page 9 5 Inte rnal Ze ro S pan With the zero span assembly option a source of span gas is connected to the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the ZERO port as and Sample Valves shown in Figure 9 1 Zero and span gas should be supplied at atmospheric pressure It may be necessary to use an atmospheric dump bypass plumbing arrangement to accomplish this For more information refer to the Installation chapter and the Operation chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 7 Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Ozonator Permeation Dryer ZER N N Hs PAN F NVERTER RUBBER APILLAL Ozonator Permeation Dryer Teflon Particulate Filter Ozone Particulate Filter 1 0 Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly 9 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual ONVERTER MODULE EXTERNAL PUMI Figure 9 1 Flow Diagram Zero Span Option The permeation dryer minimizes routing maintenance procedures by providing a continuous stream of dry air to the ozonator using the selective water permeation characteristics of the dryer With the permeation dryer option it is not necessary to constantly re
45. A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for Binary Responses Format Specifier for EREC Layout B 52 Model 177 Instruction Manual Text The second line of the Layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes l parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the ERec Layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The
46. B 25 Irec per Reports sets long record logging period B 25 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for long records B 26 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for short records B 26 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 31 meas mode Reports sets which measurement mode is active B 36 mode Reports operating mode in local service or remote B 44 nh3 Reports current NH3 concentration B 12 nh3 cal gas Reports sets NH span gas concentration B 30 nh3 coef Reports sets current NHs coefficient B 29 nh3 conv temp Reports current NH3 converter temperature B 13 no Reports current NO concentration B 12 no bkg Reports sets current NO background B 31 no cal gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 no coef Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 no gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 no of Irec Reports sets number of long records stored in memory B 25 no of srec Reports sets number of short records stored in memory B 25 no2 Reports current NO concentration B 12 no2 cal gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 no2 coef Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 no2 coef 1 Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 no2 coef 2 Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 no2 conv temp Reports current NO converter temperature B 13 no2 gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 9 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 10 Model 177 Instruction Manual
47. B 43 Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values c cccccccsceceeseeseeeeeeteseeseeseens B 45 Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values ccc cecccscecesesescetesesesceteseseatenesens B 46 Table B 12 Analog Current Output Range Values 0 ccc cece teeeeeees B 47 Table B 13 Analog Voltage Output Range Values 0 ccc ccececeteeeteeee B 47 Table B 14 Default Output Assignment ccc cscs tesesteseeteseeteseeeeees B 49 Table C 1 Read Coston tcctancesita eee has caches C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for 170 0 cecccccccccccscsscssescesesteseseeseetesesteseateseeceseeeees C 9 Table C 3 Write Coils for 7iivacecio cits Yast wi wasn casi restheetiow ein ites C 11 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 172 0 cccccccccccceceteseesestetesteteeteneeee D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 177 2 cecceccccccccsceseeseeseeesteseeseeseetesteseeseenes D 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 177 Chemiluminescence NH Analyzer combines proven detection technology easy to use menu driven software and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 177 has the following features e 320 x 240 graphics display e Menu driven software e Field programmable ranges e User selectable single dual auto range modes e Multiple user defined analog outputs e Analog input options e High sensitivity e Fast response time e Linearity through all ranges e Independ
48. Check temperature control board to insure the LEDs are coming on If not temperature control board could be defective Check connector pins for continuity Alarm Cooler Temp Cooler reads 99 9 C Cooler does not hold set point of 3 C 6 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Verify fans are turning replace defective fan Clean or replace foam fan filters Wait 1 hour if cooler still reads high check wiring and replace cooler Verify fans are turning replace defective fan Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Alarm Message Possible Cause Action Clean or replace foam fan filters Replace cooler thermoelectric module inside cooler failed Cooler reads 99 9 C Check cooler cabling replace thermistor Alarm Conv Temp Converter temperature low Molybdenum converter case should be hot to the touch if not the heater may have failed Check that converter temp set point is approximately 325 C Check that Converter Heater LED on temperature control board is on if not check connections to measurement interface board and replace temperature control board Check that voltage to the heater is 115 VAC Check heater connector pins for continuity Alarm External Conv External converter temperature NH converter case should be Temp low extremely hot to the touch if not the heater may have failed Check the external converter temp set point is approxim
49. Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table Model 17 Instruction Manual B 53 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Button Designator Examples B 54 Model 17 Instruction Manual lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B T L T or N B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button which only send
50. INPUTS gt IPI8 3 Pin POWER_GOOD REAR PANEL AC AC INPUT 3 Cond Pl 2 Pin FRONT PANEL gt POWERSW r i m PJ6 l TRANSFCRVIEF I get 3 Pin fete ee a oe EE 4 OVACor 240VAC eae 1 CPTIAS 1 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams INPUT BOARD j Hoax 10 Pin 2 Cond PMT HV PS 7 Pin 2 Cond ee Eii i 4 Pin SAMAER ON 5 Pin PMT ANODE AONW 3 Pin m C Zanr 2 Pin 4 Pin m _ AVBIENT TEVP HM 2 Pin EE E E ee ee I 2 Pin GAS THEM PERVIOVEN i L LEATER ISV 1W Prawa i DATA 4 Pin Ta amp O ids ANTHEM k ji lt Ps 3 Pi i C NON Sa 2 Pin zP _ avae in _ ZEROSPANSGL 2 Pin TT L spaRE1 SOL in C ia SPAPE2 SOL 24VDC 2 Pin Fant _ Fane 2 Pin 2 Pin n me Bip AC BENCHHEATER 60w in oe AC ort AC 2 Pin J2 sE C COWERTERTHAVOCOLALE PJ3 2 Pin 3 Pin A E 3 Pin PUVP Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Not Used on 17i I SERIES To Analyzer CONVERTER RS 485 INTF _ S C BYP SOL 5V4A _ J BOARD C ZISICAL SOL 24V 4A FANI Not Used on 17i 17i TEMP lap _ BENCH HEATER CONTROL 74 _ CONVERTER HEATER POWER SW BOARD j5 _ CONVERTER THERMOCOUPL
51. Me sminnen nanana a nnen ea a a 3 55 Programi Versiot sisicvevcsaidasrnin cudeadcianeesetesparseaubagtiadiseencsadiusdsuianevends 3 55 WO LEAS se oesters sotesnio cabana oaie Aa t g cates ea Ea e eni ESE 3 56 Motherboard Voltages s ssssesessesesssssesssssrsrsrsrsrsrsrsiseseresesesesseses 3 56 Interface Board Voltages ronisiionianenn ea a N i 3 56 TO Board Voltages rerenna annann e T nR 3 57 External Converter Board Voltages seeeeeeeeeeeseeeeererrrerersrsrseee 3 57 Temperatiresu c a a aaao EE E ET 3 57 Pressuteinaninie ain a a e a an a 3 58 IOA bes vata anes uel E A ES 3 58 Analog Input Readings esseseeseeeseseseessssssesrsesesrsrsssrsesrsesiseseseseses 3 58 Analog Input Voltages innnan e re e aan EE 3 59 Digital Inputs s sacs a aa G a A A Ri 3 59 Relay States erne R A A R ER 3 59 Rest Analog Qutp tss enn okee oi a Ra 3 60 Set Analog Outputs sssesesesesesesesesssesrsesesesestsrtrsrereeterereesesreres 3 60 Instrument Configuration s sessssssssssssssssssssessttseteteteerrrererersrereres 3 60 Contact Information sn nanang n p ia g iia 3 61 Alarms Menu ssena oen na a A R N 3 61 Internal Temperature sesessseseseseseeseseesesssessssssststsisesestsesesesesesesesee 3 62 Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits 3 63 Chamber Temperatur jeter aes cocpihr eddie oesee aia 3 63 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual vii Contents viii Model 177 Instruction Manual Min and Max Chamber Temperature Lim
52. Model 17 Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 28 Calibration Model 177 Instruction Manual stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to Table B 5 Send stream time Receive stream time 0 set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 5 The example below attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time 00 Receive set stream time 00 ok Table B 5 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 00 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string 01 Disables time stamp to streaming data string set cal bkg no set cal bkg nox set cal bkg nt set cal no bkg set cal nox bkg These commands will auto calibrate the NO NO and N backgrounds If the instrument is set to manual NO mode the response to set cal no bkg will be can t wrong settings The example below shows a successful auto calibration of the NO background Send set cal bkg no Receive set cal bkg no ok set cal coef no set cal high no coef set cal coef 1 no2 set cal high no2 coef set cal coef 2 no2 set cal high nox coef set cal coef nox set cal high nh3 coef set cal coef nh3 set cal high nt coef set cal coef nt set cal low no coef set cal no coef set cal low no2 coef set cal no2 coef set cal low nox coef set cal nox coef set
53. Module Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 28 Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION Ifthe LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module a 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the right of the instrument Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 55 Servicing Service Locations 5 Replace the LCD module by following previous steps in reverse Service Loca
54. Motor View Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Fan Replacement Fan Replacement A 7 16 Model 17 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the fan This applies to both the analyzer module and the converter module Figure 7 7 Equipment Required Fan Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument or converter OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter 3 Pull the power connectors off the fan 4 Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan 5 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse Mounting Screws 4 Filter l T Fan Guard Figure 7 7 Replacing the Fan Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement PMT Cooler and Use the following procedure to replace the PMT cooler and reaction Reaction Chamber chamber assembly see Figure 7 8 Assembly Replacement Equipment Required PMT cooler Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Nut driver 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver Wire cutters amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by s
55. NH3 40019 amp 40020 LOW Nt 40021 amp 40022 HIGH NO 40023 amp 40024 HIGH N02 40025 amp 40026 HIGH NOx 40027 amp 40028 HIGH NH3 40029 amp 40030 HIGH Nt 40031 amp 40032 RANGE 40033 amp 40034 NOT USED 40035 amp 40036 INTERNAL TEMPERATURE 40037 amp 40038 CHAMBER TEMPERATURE 40039 amp 40040 COOLER TEMPERATURE 40041 amp 40042 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP 40043 amp 40044 EXTERNAL CONVERTER TEMP 40045 amp 40046 NOT USED 40047 amp 40048 NOT USED 40049 amp 40050 CHAMBER PRESSURE 40051 amp 40052 SAMPLE FLOW 40053 amp 40054 PMT VOLTS 40055 amp 40056 ANALOG IN 1 40057 amp 40058 ANALOG IN 2 40059 amp 40060 ANALOG IN 3 40061 amp 40062 ANALOG IN 4 40063 amp 40064 ANALOG IN 5 40065 amp 40066 ANALOG IN 6 40067 amp 40068 ANALOG IN 7 40069 amp 40070 ANALOG IN 8 40071 amp 40072 OZONATOR FLOW Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Number Variable 40073840074 NOT USED 40075 amp 40076 NOT USED 40077 amp 40078 NOT USED 40079 amp 40080 NO CORRECTION CONC 40081 amp 40082 NO2 CORRECTION CONC 40083 amp 40084 NOx CORRECTION CONC 40085 amp 40086 NH3 CORRECTION CONC 40087 amp 40088 Nt CORRECTION CONC 40089 amp 40090 LOW NO CORRECTION CONC 40091 amp 40092 LOW NO2 CORRECTION CONC 40093 amp 40094 LOW NOx CORRECTION CONC 40095 amp 40096 LOW NH3 CORRECTION CONC 40097 amp 40098 LOW Nt CORRECTION CONC 40099 amp 40100 HIGH
56. NO CORRECTION CONC 40101 amp 40102 HIGH NO2 CORRECTION CONC 40103 amp 40104 HIGH NOx CORRECTION CONC 40105 amp 40106 HIGH NH3 CORRECTION CONC 40107 amp 40108 HIGH Nt CORRECTION CONC 40109 amp 40110 CAPILLARY TEMP If O2 Correction Option is installed Table C 3 Write Coils for 17i Coil Number Action Triggered 101 ZERO MODE 102 SPAN MODE 103 NO MODE 104 NOX MODE 105 Nt MODE 106 NOT USED 107 SET BACKGROUND 108 CAL TO LO SPAN 109 AOUTS TO ZERO 110 AOUTS TO FS 111 CAL TO HI SPAN Model 17 Instruction Manual C 11 Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Geysitech Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Geysitech protocol support for the Series enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands listed below For details of the Model 177 Geysitech Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 e Instrument Address on page D 2
57. NO srp from NO Igtp NO INom SNOM 5 Ifthe nominal NO concentration of the working standard is unknown generate several NO concentrations to give on scale NO responses 6 Measure and record the NO gasflow and total flow Fno and Fr for each NO concentration generated 7 Plot the analyzer NO response versus Fno Fr and determine the slope which gives NO srp directly The analyzer NOx responses to the Model 17 Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Equipment Required generated NO concentrations reflect any NO impurity in the NO working standard 8 Plot the difference between the analyzer NO and NO responses versus Fno Fr The slope of this plot is NOz imp Zero Air A source of zero air free of contaminants should be used as described earlier in this chapter Contaminants can cause a detectable response on the instrument and may also react with the NO O3 or NO during the gas phase titration Dynamic Parameter Use the following definitions for the remainder of this chapter Specifications for Pr Dynamic parameter specification to ensure complete reaction of the Gas Titrator available O3 ppm min NOl rc NO concentration in the reaction chamber ppm tk residence time of the reactant gases in the reaction chamber min INO sto Concentration of the undiluted NO standard ppm Fro NO flow rate sccm Fo O generator air flow rate sccm Vre Volume of the reaction chamber cc Fr Analyzer demand plus 10 t
58. Operation Range Menu The Gas Units screen defines how the NO NO2 NO NH and N concentration readings are expressed Gas units of parts per billion ppb parts per million ppm micrograms per cubic meter ug m or milligrams per cubic meter mg m are available The pg m and mg m gas concentration modes are calculated using a standard pressure of 760 mmHg and a standard temperature of 20 C When switching the selected units from ppb or ppm to pg m or mg m the analog ranges all default to the highest range in that mode For example when switching from mg m to ppm all the ranges default to 20 ppm Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Gas Units Note If the units change from ppb ppm to pg m mg m or vice versa the instrument should be re calibrated particularly if the user s standard temperature is different from 20 C A display warning will appear that ranges will be defaulted and calibration parameters reset A boyd iPad The NO NO NO NH3 and N Ranges screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example a NO2 range of 0 50 ppb restricts the NO analog output to concentrations between 0 and 50 ppb The display shows the current NO NO2 NO NH or N range The next line of the display is used to change the range The range screen is similar for the single dual and auto range modes The only
59. Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt t T T Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T t T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode then a value of 0 0 will be reported The following measurements reported in response to DA command are for the Model 172 The 5 measurements reported in single range mode include e NO e NO e NO e NH e N The 10 measurements reported in dual or auto range modes include e low NO high NO e low NO high NO e low NO high NO e low NH high NH e lowN high N Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Operating and Error See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 17 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 1 Maintenance Local 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 Zero gas On 0 10 0 10 0 1 0
60. The ozone generator must be capable of generating sufficient and stable levels of ozone for reaction with NO to generate NO concentrations in the range required Note Ozone generators of the electric discharge type may produce NO and NO and are not recommended A A valve can be used to divert the NO flow when zero air is required at the manifold The reaction chamber used for the reaction of ozone with excess NO should have sufficient volume so that the residence time meets the requirements specified in this chapter The mixing chamber is used to provide thorough mixing of the reaction 8 P 8 8 products and diluent air The output manifold should be of sufficient diameter to insure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold The following information describes the NO concentration standard and the method for calculating the NO concentration standard and the NO2 impurity A cylinder containing 10 to 50 ppm NO in Nz with less than 1 ppm NO is usually used as the concentration standard The cylinder must be traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST NO in N2 Standard Reference Material or NO2 Standard Reference Material Procedures for certifying the NO cylinder working standard against an NIST traceable NO or NO standard and for determining the amount of
61. a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte 0xAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol This lt control commands is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode Command K switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode Command M switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt Model 17 Instruction Manual D 3 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If th
62. be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of analog outputs to zero with the active state being high Send din 5 Receive din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 35 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use list din var command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index number and output variable and the active state assigned to output channel The example below reports the input 2 to be assigned an index number 2 corresponding to local remote with the active state being open Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters according to able B 14 The example below shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular ou
63. below reports that the measurement mode is set to NO Send meas mode Receive meas mode no Thermo Fisher Scientific Hardware Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration set meas mode mode mode no nox nt no nox nt This command sets the instrument to NO NO N auto mode manual NO mode NO mode or manual N mode The example below sets the instrument to the manual NO mode Send set meas mode no Receive set meas mode no ok pres comp pe These commands report whether pressure compensation is on or off The example below shows that pressure compensation is on Send pres comp Receive pres comp on set pres comp onoff set tcd d 0 off 1 on These commands turn the pressure compensation on or off The example below turns pressure compensation off Send set pres comp off Receive set pres comp off ok temp comp tc These commands report whether temperature compensation is on or off The example below shows the temperature compensation is off Send temp comp Receive temp comp off set temp comp onoff set tc d d 0 off 1 on These commands turn the temperature compensation on or off The example below turns temperature compensation off Send set temp comp off Receive set temp comp off ok contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The example below shows the screen contrast is 50 according to Tabl
64. bkg nox Sets auto calibrates NO background B 28 cal bkg nt Sets auto calibrates N background B 28 cal coef 1 no2 Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 cal coef 2 no2 Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 cal coef nh3 Sets auto calibrates NH coefficient B 28 cal coef no Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 cal coef nox Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 cal coef nt Sets auto calibrates N coefficient B 28 cal gas nh3 Reports sets NH3 span gas concentration B 30 cal gas no Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 cal gas no2 Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 cal gas nox Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 30 cal gas nt Reports sets N span gas concentration B 30 cal high nh3 coef Sets auto calibrates high range NH coefficient B 28 B 4 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page cal high no coef Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient B 28 cal high no2 coef Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient B 28 cal high nox coef Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient B 28 cal high nt coef Sets auto calibrates high range N coefficient B 28 cal low nh3 coef Sets auto calibrates low range NH coefficient B 28 cal low no coef Sets auto calibrates low range NO coefficient B 28 cal low no2 coef Sets auto cal
65. cal low nh3 coef set cal low nt coef Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration These commands will auto calibrate NO NO NO NH and N coefficients based on NO NO2 NOx NH and N span gas concentrations The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The example below shows a successful auto calibration of the low NO coefficient Send set cal low no coef Receive set cal low no coef ok coef no high no coef high coef 1 no2 coef 1 no2 high no2 coef 1 high coef 2 no2 coef 2 no2 high no2 coef 2 low coef 1 no2 coef no2 high no2 coef low coef 2 no2 coef nox high nox coef coef nh3 high nh3 coef coef nt high nt coef no coef low no coef no2 coef 1 low no2 coef 1 no2 coef 2 low no2 coef 2 no2 coef low no2 coef nox coef low nox coef nh3 coef low nh3 coef nt coef low nt coef These commands report NO NO NH3 N and two NO coefficients in single range mode or the high and low range coefficients in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The example below reports that the NO coefficient is 1 000 Send coef no Receive coef no 1 000 set coef no value set high no coef value set high coef 1 no2 value set coef 1 no2 value set high no2 coef 1 value set high coef 2 no2 value set coef 2 no2
66. channel while sampling zero air The N background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the N channel while sampling zero air Although the background is expressed in terms of concentration the background signal is actually the combination of electrical offsets PMT dark currents and trace substances undergoing chemiluminescence Before the analyzer sets the NO NO and N readings to zero it stores these values as the NO NO and N background corrections respectively The NO and NH3 background corrections are determined from the NO NO and N background corrections and are not displayed The background corrections are typically below 15 ppb The NO NO and N Background screens are used to perform a manual zero calibration of the instrument Before performing a zero calibration allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable readings are obtained The NO channel should be calibrated first The NO NOx and N Background screens operate the same way Therefore the following description of the NO background applies to the NOx and N background screens as well The first line of the display shows the current NO reading The second line of the display shows the NO background correction that will be stored in memory The NO background correction is a value expressed in the current gas units that is subtracted from the NO reading to produce the NO reading that is displayed In the example below the analyzer displays 5 2
67. chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principles of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setup and startup the analyzer Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven software Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the software structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment that can be used with this anal
68. cienpaGasendes 8 10 Input Board Assembly ccissssvescsosssnsvestisescansvisncsesiansarsaesnedeslassncvettsVens 8 10 Digital Output BOAR secarrect coxsascv sede vas cnzsbyeebsat opheuelsivss toman sab vasceosts 8 10 I O Expansion Board Optional s 2ic 02 225 s3eds tealacdesiesteauseseeeetass 8 11 Front Panel Connector Board sic e wiuneakearal eatin dation 8 11 VO Gomiponents i erona dee Seance KA AA saat ARE 8 11 Analog Voltage Outputs sssssesesesssesesesesesesesesrsrsrsrsrsrseseseseseseses 8 11 Analog Current Outputs Optional ssseseeseesseeseseseresrrererersrseererss 8 12 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional ssessssssssesesessssseeeseresrrerrrereresesesss 8 12 Digital Relay Outputs a sr tie e a ea eae ee cae ee 8 12 Digital Inputs en saran aee e a a Stes 8 12 Seral Porrera ee e aids Safe tae terete NE 8 13 RS 232 Connecti ona s goa okei ae a a a a 8 13 RS 485 Connection insirisci iaiu riin aiiis 8 14 Ethernet Connettoni se s aiaa ie ii 8 14 External Accessory Connector auicenuh ccc tian ance ected 8 14 Optional Equipment ciccceescts uch cect Gani erhatinnte 9 1 Internal Zero Span and Sample Valves 9 1 Ozonator Permeation Dive bec eetee cis ice ee vsaes hese ae eae 9 2 Teflon Particulate Wi tenss2s 2 dlassresancgens loadieasstetacetuanvahc secre nanetaeatenss 9 2 Ozone Particulate Wilber nerize uoadas tar tain dasa Mee acne Ae eae 9 2 I O Expansion Board Assembly siccisch n ledeonstihettahevattohit satanedsladenhatahetoiee 9 2 25 Pi
69. command will be set no coef 1 234 NO 21f Code_ 0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code_7 Code_8 Code_9 Code 10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zeroth value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Model 17 Instruction Manual B 55 C Lin
70. e a A ne a ERE aA 3 72 Converter Set Temperature nrisiiii pal ieii niia 3 72 External Converter Set Temperature ix ci ciiseunieiauidiian 3 73 Press re Calibratio mseto inini 3 73 Calibrate Pressure Zero ssssssssssessserereresestsrssrstsrsererresrsrsrsrsrereees 3 74 Calibrate Press te Spam ienasi iea n ER 3 74 Restore Default Pressure Calibration senneeeeeeeeeeereen 3 75 Flow Calibrations ssena a iii E E 3 75 Calibrate Plow Acre arinola net e EN RA ES 3 75 Calibrate Flow Spaniacuscecitucianwniiinweutad saddae 3 76 Restore Default Flow Calibrations cst sctetenel ohieekee date 3 76 Input Board Calibration cage pest ce tat ccoledcceveeiaterahce teet ee Racer eGA ek cad aces 3 77 Manual Input Calibraniontc c 14 pasado ue heen atetent oe 3 77 Automatic Input Calibration 16 218 Gta eee ee ates 3 78 Input Frequency Display sicisssiactacecaiatiesi cise tuesreatetadttiaeeeivnce 3 78 Temperature lt aliDRAt ON rise scce ie alca ceeds bs cetenacnt ace ut Suey ea deuitse 3 79 Analog Output Calibration aiscccstciacecniveninuwotaeevsnes 3 79 Analog Output Calibrate Zero ccc salute eine eras 3 80 Analog Output Calibrate Pull Scales i tsiindier lanes 3 80 Analog Input Calibrationinua a teste raat natn ie ina 3 81 Analog Input Calibrate Zero ens visitvaicdedecessisdeccelbeete netibecteeedencens 3 81 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale si acisnenaiis doncueeen 3 82 Ozohator Safety eoan a e e a EE E AA S 3 82 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fishe
71. eunssaig dwiay 13 009 MO 4 sBumag wwog 4209 ON 1e9 L J209 ON buey HN Piomssed 3AOW Y dial 5 AUOD xa dw Medeo ainssaig Sumas Bulbbojeyeq 209 ON Ieo 209 ON e6uey ON Piomsseg ebueyD dway jag nuog dway saqueyp sdwa apow uey oiny Byg NIeO 6yq N abuey ON juewinsysuy 4907 eles spo ebuey dwiay jeusojuy sabeyon Aiddns Ld Byg ON 1e9 6g ON abuey ON Puomssed 18S py a6ey0n Ld paepejeg suueiy suoisia wesbOld 40 2U0ZOQ 6g ON 12D 64g ON au Bay syun seg Piomssed 91A1aS swejy sonsoubeig SAUNAS uoHesqyed de aes aimee abuey l nu y uren u 19 UNY u 19S SOL HES u 19S dn samod Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Software 3 5 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Software Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed on power up of the Model 177 The Self Test is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are performed Thermo SCIENTIFIC iSeries Run Screen The Run screen displays the NO NO2 NO NHs and N concentrations The status bar displays optional zero span solenoid valves if installed time and alarm status The word SAMPLE on the bottom left of the display indicates the analyzer has the span zero valve option and is in SAMPLE mode Other modes appear in the same area of the display as ZERO or SPAN For more information about the optional solenoid valves see Chapter 9 O
72. from the reaction is converted to an electrical signal by the PMT and sent to the input board that transmits it to the processor The thermoelectric PMT cooler reduces the PMT temperature to approximately 3 C to minimize dark current and increase instrument sensitivity The cooler helps to increase zero and span stability over a wide ambient temperature range The cooler housing also shields the PMT from external electrical and optical interferences Thermo Fisher Scientific External Pump Dry Air Capillary Ammonia Scrubber Software Instrument Control Monitoring Signals Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description External Pump The external pump draws the reacted gasses out of the reaction chamber The dry air capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the dry air line The ammonia scrubbers are mounted internally and remove ammonia from the sample air The processor software tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument Control e Monitoring Signals e Measurement Calculations e Output Communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O and heater control These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on p
73. high no coef Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 29 high no gas Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration B 30 high no2 Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B 12 coefficients high no2 coef Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 29 high no2 coef 1 Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 29 high no2 coef 2 Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 29 high no2 gas Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration B 30 high nox Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B 12 coefficients high nox coef Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 29 high nox gas Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration B 30 high nt Reports N concentration calculated with high range B 12 coefficients high nt coef Reports sets high range N coefficients B 29 high nt gas Reports sets high range N span gas concentration B 30 high range nh3 Reports selects current NH high range B 33 high range no Reports selects current NO high range B 33 high range no2 Reports selects current NO high range B 33 high range nox Reports selects current NO high range B 33 high range nt Reports selects current N high range B 33 host name Reports sets host name string B 43 instr name Reports instrument name B 43 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 44 internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature B 13 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 32 layout ack Disables stale layout layout changed
74. indicator B 46 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 177 Instruction Manual Command Description Page le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 31 list din Lists current selection for digital input B 21 list dout Lists current selection for digital output B 21 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 21 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 21 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 21 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 21 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 49 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 49 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 49 low avg time Reports sets low averaging time B 11 low coef 1 no2 Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low coef 2 no2 Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low nh3 Reports NH concentration calculated with low range B 12 coefficients low nh3 coef Reports sets low range NH coefficient B 29 low nh3 gas Reports sets low range NH span gas concentration B 30 low no Reports NO concentration calculated with low range B 12 coefficients low no coef Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low no gas Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration B 30 low no2 Reports NO concen
75. mode sample set sample set sample gas set gas 0 sample These commands set the zero span valves to the sample mode The example below sets the instrument to sample mode that is the instrument is reading the sample gas Model 17 Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 36 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send set sample Receive set sample ok set zero set zero gas set gas 1 zero These commands set the zero span valves to the zero mode The example below sets the instrument to zero mode that is the instrument is reading the sample gas Send set zero Receive set zero ok set span set span gas set gas 2 span These commands set the zero span valves to the span mode The example below sets the instrument to span mode that is the instrument is sampling span gas Send set span Receive set span ok gas unit gu These commands report the current gas units ppb ppm pg m or mg m The example below reports that the gas unit is set to ppb Send gas unit Receive gas unit ppb set gas unit set gud unit ppb ppm g m mg m d 0 ppb 1 ppm 2 ug m 3 mg m These commands set the gas units to ppb ppm pg m or mg m The example below sets the gas units to mg m Send set gas unit mg m3 Receive set gas unit mg m3 ok meas mode This command reports which measurement mode NO NO N NO NO or N is active The example
76. of NO Specifically light emission results when electronically excited NO molecules decay to lower energy states The light emission is detected by a photomultiplier tube which in turn generates a proportional electronic signal The electronic signal is processed by the microcomputer into a NO concentration reading Figure 1 1 To measure the NO NO NO concentration NO is transformed to NO prior to reaching the reaction chamber This transformation takes place in a molybdenum converter heated to approximately 325 C Upon reaching the reaction chamber the converted molecules along with the original NO molecules react with ozone The resulting signal represents the NO reading To measure the N NO NO NH3 concentration both the NO and NH are transformed to NO prior to reaching the reaction chamber This transformation takes place in a stainless steel converter heated to approximately 750 C Upon reaching the reaction chamber the converted molecules along with the original NO molecules react with ozone The resulting signal represents the N Nrorat reading The NO concentration is determined by subtracting the signal obtained in the NO mode from the signal obtained in the NOx mode NO NO NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications The NH concentration is determined by subtracting the signal obtained in the NO mode from the signal obtained in the N mode N NOx NH The Mo
77. pin cables 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PIND RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 82 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE 37 LIGHT GREEN BLACK Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Mounting Options The instrument can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 2 through Figure 9 5 This applies to both the analyzer module and the converter module Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack Mounted in a Thermo non ElA rack includes mounting slides and retrofit front panel rack mounting handles Figure 9 2 Rack Mount Option Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 3 Bench Mounting 9 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 4 EIA Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 9 7 Optional Equipment
78. ppb of NO while sampling zero air A background correction of 0 0 ppb means that 0 ppb is being subtracted from the NO concentration being displayed Therefore the background correction must be increased to 5 2 ppb in order for the NO reading to be at 0 ppb i e a NO reading of 5 2 ppb minus a NO background reading of 5 2 ppb gives the corrected NO reading of 0 ppb To set the NO reading in the example below to zero use to increment the NO background correction to 5 2 ppb As the NO background correction is increased the NO concentration is decreased Note that at this point pressing t Jand however has no affect on the analog outputs or the stored NO background correction of 0 0 ppb A question mark following both the NO reading and the NO background correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To escape this screen without saving any changes press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or to return to the Run screen Press to actually set the NO reading to 0 ppb and Thermo Fisher Scientific NO NO2 NOx NHs and N Coefficients Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Factors Menu store the new background correction of 5 2 ppb Then the question mark prompt beside the NO reading disappears e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt NO NOx or Nt BKG te ERED CH Py EN EEE TE Sanat Bone EET hei Bat i The NO NO NO
79. present or an unsafe practice can result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A CAUTION The hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A Equipment Damage The hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored A Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Safety and Equipment damage Alerts in this Manual Alert Description WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A The Model 177 is supplied with a three wire grounding cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A CAUTION Ozone is present in the exhaust therefore the exhaust should be plumbed to a suitable vent A If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A This adjustment should only be performed by
80. range nox Reports sets current NO range B 33 range nt Reports sets current N range B 33 react temp Reports current reaction chamber temperature B 14 relay stat Reports sets relay logic status to for the designated relay s B 50 ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 31 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 31 sample Sets zero span valves to sample mode B 35 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Command Description Page sample flow Reports current measured sample flow in LPM B 13 sample gas Sets zero span valves to sample gas mode B 35 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 40 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 40 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 33 Use iscreen instead sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 27 span Sets zero span valves to span mode B 36 span gas Sets zero span valves to span gas mode B 36 sr Reports last short record stored B 22 srec Reports maximum number of short records B 23 srec format Reports sets output format for short records ASCII or binary B 24 srec layout Reports current layout of short record data B 24 srec mem size Reports maximum number of short records B 25 srec per Reports sets short record logging period B 25 stream per Reports sets current set time interval for streaming data B 27 stream time Re
81. rear slightly and lift it off the base screws 4 Loosen two screws on the input box assembly and lift the input box assembly off the power supply Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing PMT Voltage Adjustment 5 Remove the four screws securing the power supply to the bracket and remove the power supply Assembly Bracket HVPS Input Box Screws 2 Assembly Bracket Screws 2 Figure 7 10 Replacing the PMT HVPS 6 To install the power supply follow the previous steps in reverse 7 Recalibrate the instrument Refer to the calibration procedures in the Calibration chapter PMT Voltage Use the following procedure to adjust the PMT voltage after switching Ad ju stment from standard to extended ranges or vice versa service representatives A f WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified 1 Select the NO NO2 NO NH and N ranges Refer to Range Menu in the Operation chapter 2 Set the NO BKG NO BKG and N BKG calibration factors to 0 0 Refer to Calibration Factors Menu in the Operation chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal 7 22 Model 17 Instruction Manual A 3 Set the NO COEF NO COEF N COEF NO COEF and NH COEF to 1 000 4 Set the Averaging Time to 10 seconds Refer to Averaging Time in the Operation
82. ri Communication Protocol The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the instrument communication protocol for serial communications e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Communication Protocol Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu my Pv ig Ehe EE F Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Item Signal submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A Note The selected item list is different depending on the AUTO MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings Changing either of these settings will produce a different set of streaming data items If either of these modes are going to be changed on a regular basis then the user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config fine Py Tame tb tpobe iYi Labi ik i Streaming Data Interval The
83. set alarm capillary temp max 50 0 ok alarm chamber temp min alarm chamber temp max These commands report the chamber temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the chamber temperature alarm minimum value is 47 0 C Send alarm chamber temp min Receive alarm chamber temp min 47 0 deg C set alarm chamber temp min value set alarm chamber temp max value These commands set the chamber temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the chamber temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the chamber temperature alarm maximum value to 50 0 C Send set alarm chamber temp max 50 0 Receive set alarm chamber temp max 50 0 ok alarm conc no min alarm conc no max alarm conc no2 min alarm conc no2 max alarm conc nox min alarm conc nox max alarm conc nh3 min alarm conc nh3 max alarm conc nt min alarm conc nt max These commands report the NO NO2 NOx NH3 and N concentration alarm minimum and maximum values current setting The example below reports that the NO concentration minimum is 5 2 ppb Send alarm conc no min Receive alarm conc no min 5 2 ppb set alarm conc no min value set alarm conc no max value set alarm conc no2 min value set alarm conc no2 max value set alarm conc nox min value set alarm conc nox max value set alarm conc nh3 min value set alarm conc nh3 max value set alarm conc nt min value
84. set alarm conc nt max value These commands set the NO NO NO NH3 and N concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The example below sets the NO concentration alarm maximum value to 215 Send set alarm conc no max 215 Receive set alarm conc no max 215 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms alarm converter temp min alarm converter temp max These commands report the converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the converter temperature alarm minimum value is 300 0 C Send alarm converter temp min Receive alarm converter temp min 300 0 deg C set alarm converter temp min value set alarm converter temp max value These commands set the converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the converter temperature alarm maximum value to 340 0 C Send set alarm converter temp max 340 Receive set alarm converter temp max 340 ok alarm ext conv temp min alarm ext conv temp max These commands report the external converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the c
85. short records that have been saved The example below clears short records Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the long records lrecs or short records srecs The example below reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec is minimum Send data treatment lrec Receive data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the long records lrecs or short records srecs The example below sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec to minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Send list dout Receive list dout output index variable state 1 35 CONC ALARM open 3 4 UNITS open 4 11 GEN ALARM closed 7 7 NO MODE open 8 8 NOX MODE open list Irec list srec list stream list sp These comman
86. stabilize After those three seconds it accumulates the signal counts for seven seconds before again switching the solenoid The calculations of the NO NO NO NHs3 and N concentrations are lengthy and use the high level processor to provide the most accurate readings The calculations begin by subtracting the appropriate electronic offset from the seven second count accumulation Following this correction the raw accumulated counts are scaled according to the gain setting of the input board Next the uncorrected NO NO and N values are determined according to a unique averaging algorithm which minimizes errors resulting from rapidly changing gas concentrations This algorithm results in NO NO and N values which are stored in RAM in a circular buffer that holds all the ten second data from the previous five minutes This data is averaged over the selected time interval which can be any multiple of ten between 10 and 300 the manual modes have additional intervals of 1 2 and 5 seconds The background values for NO NO and N which are corrected for temperature are subtracted from their respective averages The NO reading is corrected by the stored span factor and by the temperature factor The NO reading is partially corrected by the span factor temperature factor and balance factor The N reading is partially corrected by the span factor temperature factor and balance factor The corrected NO value is subtracted from th
87. the 5 45 C Power requirements 100 VAC 50 60 Hz 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 300 Watts analyzer 600 Watts converter Physical dimensions each 16 75 W X 8 62 H X 23 D Weight analyzer module Approximately 60 Ibs analyzer including external pump Approximately 29 Ibs converter Analog outputs 6 voltage outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V User selectable 5 of full scale over under range 12 bit resolution user programmable Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 digital relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial Ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate 1200 115200 Protocols C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen and streaming data all user selectable Ethernet connection RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP addressing In non condensing environments Performance specifications based on operation in 15 35 C range Thermo Fisher Scientific Lifting A Unpacking and Thermo Fisher Scientific Inspection Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Model 17 includes lifting the instrument unpacking and inspection connecting sample zero span and exhaust lines and attaching analog outputs to a recording device The installation should always be followed by
88. the NO calibration gas concentration is the same as the NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO impurities c Set the NO calibration gas concentration to the NOx concentration 4 12 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate N 4 Calibration Calibration Use _ to move the cursor left and right and use t to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor d Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration The exact NO concentration is calculated from Fro X INO I stp NO lmp NOx Jour NO STD 2 JIMP Fro Fo Fp Where NO our diluted NO concentration at the output manifold ppm NOz imp concentration of NO impurity in the standard NO cylinder ppm The NO recorder response will equal Recorder Response scale Where NOx lour x 100 URL Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel ppm e Record the NOx concentration and the analyzer s NO response Calibrate the N channel to the N calibration gas a Press to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal Nt Coefficient b Verify that the N calibration gas concentration is the same as the NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO impurities There should be no NH in the NO span source used c Set the N calibration gas concentration to the N concentration
89. then both pressure readings are the same If pressure compensation is off a pressure of 100 mmHg is used as default pressure even though the actual pressure is 105 2 mmHg The example below shows that the actual reaction chamber pressure is 105 2 mmHg Send pres Receive pres 100 0 mm Hg actual 105 2 react temp This command reports the current reaction chamber temperature The example below reports that the current reaction temperature is 49 9 C Send react temp Receive react temp 49 9 deg C flags This reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status of the ozonator PMT pressure and temperature compensation status gas units gas mode and alarms To decode the flags each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in the Figure B 1 It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter In the example below the instrument is reporting that the ozonator and PMT are both on that the instrument is in the span gas mode and that the NO high concentration alarm is activated Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarms Send flags Receive flags 50001640 4 hex digits ie wert to binary NS conversion table
90. to Flow Calibration gt and press The Flow Sensor Cal menu appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 10 11 At the Flow Sensor Cal menu press to select Zero The Calibrate Flow Zero screen appears Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize then press to save the zero flow value Reconnect the pump cable to the AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board Connect a calibrated flow sensor at the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel Press to return to the Flow Sensor Cal menu At the Flow Sensor Cal menu press _ J to select Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen appears Wait at least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize use _ and to enter the flow sensor reading and press to save the value Install the cover Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 51 Servicing Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement A Converter Interface Board Replacement A 7 52 Model 17i Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the converter temperature control board Figure 7 3 Equipment Required Converter temperature control board Small flat blade screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic
91. value set high no2 coef 2 value set low coef 1 no2 value set coef no2 value set high no2 coef value set low coef 2 no2 value set coef nox value set high nox coef value set coef nh3 value set high nh3 coef value set coef nt value set high nt coef value set no coef value set low no coef value set no2 coef 1 value set low no2 coef 1 value set no2 coef 2 value set low no2 coef 2 value set no2 coef value set low no2 coef value set nox coef value set low nox coef value set nh3 coef value set low nh3 coef value set nt coef value set low nt coef value Model 17 Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 30 Model 17 Instruction Manual These commands set the NO NO NH3 N and two NO coefficients to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The example below sets the NO coefficient to 1 005 Send set no coef 1 005 Receive set no coef 1 005 ok no cal gas nox gas no2 cal gas high no gas nox cal gas high no2 gas nh3 cal gas high nox gas nt cal gas high nh3 gas cal gas no high nt gas cal gas no2 low no gas cal gas nox low no2 gas cal gas nh3 low nox gas cal gas nt low nh3 gas no gas low nt gas no2 gas These commands report NO NO2 NO NH and N span gas concentrations used to auto calibrate NO NO2 NOx NHs and N coefficients The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument res
92. wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument and converter module OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover from the converter 2 Disconnect all connectors from the converter temperature control board Use a small flat blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the CONV TC cable Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the yellow wire is towards the front 3 Snap off the board from the board mounts 4 To install the converter temperature control board follow previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the converter interface board Figure 7 26 Equipment Required Converter interface board Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component amp 1 Turn instrument and converter module OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Converter Interface Board Replacement 2 Unplug all connectors from the converter interface board Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection 3 Using the nut driver unscrew the two standoffs holding the converter interface board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 27 4 Pop off the converter interface board from support bracket and remove the converter interface boar
93. 1 Troubleshooting Guides seseesseeeeeeeesesessssssssssssesssisisrsesrsesesesesesesesee 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagrams ssesseseseeeesereseresrrrsererersseseseseses 6 9 Connector Pin Descriptions eeeseseseersereresreresrestertssrsrreresreresresereese 6 11 Seryic L cati n Siia a a a aa 6 27 STIATE e E a E E E E E vnatest anceraiaseovaanaes 7 1 Safety Precautions renan a a R R ANRT 7 3 Fitmware Updatesioioueniis radai A a a 2 7 4 Accessing the Service Modez ssiri ionia anas 7 4 Replacement Parts LISCrsniie ninani Te ia E e E a 7 4 Cable listann ansni ete cs ea A O NE 7 6 External Device Connection Components s s sssesesessssssssssrsrsesesreesessses 7 7 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel7 10 Pump Replacement iinr ear ea itani 7 11 Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement 7 12 Diaphragm Replacemienttc sci sian sco a seed eens see 7 13 Valve Replacements ieena aie EAE EER gee eat 7 14 Fan Replacement anniari tas cc a e aha 2 AEE N RRIS 7 16 PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement 7 17 Photomultiplier Tube Replacement o sctosoe essccaieoss codstaseensteesetonitevonss 7 19 PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement eeeeseereeeeeeees 7 20 PMT Voltage Adj stme t deian es Ata 7 21 Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal sssr 7 22 NO gt to NO Converter Replacement s sssssssssssssssssssereeersrerersrsesesreree 7 24 NH Converter Replacement cxscivecs cs iovcatncec
94. 10 Span gas On 0 10 0 10 1 0 0 10 Gas Unit Indication ppm OR ppb 10 0 0 1 0 10 0 0 Ozonator Off 0 0 1 10 0 7 0 0 0 PMT Off 0 J1 0 J0 0 J0 0 7 0 Not used 1 10 0 7 0 0 J0 0 7 0 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 17i D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 J1 0 10 Any Temperature Alarm 0 10 0 10 1 0 0 0 Pressure Alarm 0 0 0 l1 0 10 0 0 Sample Flow Alarm 0 0 1 0 0 10 0 0 Ozonator Flow Alarm 0 l1 0 0 0 J0 0 10 Not used 1 10 0 0 0 J0 0 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual D 7
95. 120 9 180 180 10 240 240 11 300 300 no high no low no no2 high no2 low no2 nox high nox low nox nh3 high nh3 low nh3 nt high nt low nt These commands report the measured NO NO2 NOx NH and N concentrations when operating in single range or high and low NO NO NO NH and N when operating in dual or auto range mode The example below shows that the NO concentration is 40 ppb Send no Receive no 0 040E 03 ppb Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements capillary temp This command reports the current capillary chamber temperature The example below reports that the current capillary chamber temperature is 49 9 C Send capillary temp Receive capillary temp 49 9 deg C no2 conv temp conv temp This command reports the current NO converter temperature The example below reports that the current converter temperature is 325 C Send no2 conv temp Receive no2 conv temp 325 deg C nh3 conv temp This command reports the current NH external converter temperature The example below reports that the current external converter temperature is 775 C Send nh3 conv temp Receive nh3 conv temp 775 deg C cooler temp This command reports the current PMT cooler temperature The example below reports that the current PMT cooler temperature is 7 5 C Send pmt temp Receive pmt temp 7 5 deg C flow sample flow These commands report the current measured
96. 7 Connect the communication cable from analyzer to converter module 8 Plug the analyzer and converter into outlets of the appropriate voltage and frequency WARNING The Model 17i is supplied with three wire grounding cords Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Connecting External Devices Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries External Devices instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Terminal Board PCB The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for iSeries Assemblies instruments e T O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O Expansion Board 1 0 Terminal Board Figure 2 5 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 1 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Note All of the I O available in the instrument are not brough
97. 7 Table 3 8 Signal Type Group ChOices 0 ceccececcscescstesesceteseseseeteseeteseeeeees 3 49 Table 4 1 Scrubbing Materials 2 0 0 0 cccccccccccsscssescsescssesesesesesesesteseseseaeeees 4 2 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide oo cece ce teseeteseeteseeeees 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages cccccecccececesesesteteeseetenesees 6 6 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions 0511105111051111511111 6 12 Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram 0 ccccccceceseeneeeeees 6 19 Table 6 6 O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 21 Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 0 0 cccce 6 22 Table 6 8 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions c cece cece teeeeeees 6 23 Table 6 9 Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 24 Table 6 10 Converter Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 25 Table 6 11 Converter Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Dese dai OS eee ne easier r CRE eer ad en eee eee eee 6 26 Table 7 1 Model 177 Replacement Parts ccc cecscetesesesteteseseetetenees 7 4 Table 7 2 Model 177 Cables ccccccceeeessecsestesteseeseeseeestesteseeseeeeteseeseenees 7 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Component c ccccceccsceceseeteeeeees 7 7 Table 7 4 Analog Output Ch
98. 7 7 N amp 0 0 2 SI 0 0 2 6 Alarm L Ambient Temperature Not Reaction Chamber Temperature ed Capillary Temperature PMT Temperature NO onverter Temperature NH Converter Temperature Ext Pressure Flo ware no flow alarr Display Parar f saet lk NOx t Put Hi anual NO 1 nit Or nual NOx AA Mod itu Off Alart tus nual N ppl ppm sample no alarr ug n zerc 7 g lo ilarr Senoi span Hex to Binary Conversion Table high alar g E NOTE x Pe S r D if ther 1 flow E FLAG STATUS 17i wart s higt 7 Fas LOGO TRANSLATOR REV A Figure B 14 Flags Alarms alam capillary temp min alarm capillary temp max These commands report the capillary temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the capillary temperature alarm minimum value is 47 0 C Send Receive alarm capillary temp min alarm capillary temp min 47 0 deg C set alarm capillary temp min value set alarm capillary temp max value These commands set the capillary temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the capillary temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the capillary temperature alarm maximum value to 50 0 a Model 17 Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send set alarm capillary temp max 50 0 Receive
99. C2 C3 C3 c3 c3 C1 C2 and C3 are custom ranges For more information about custom ranges see Set Custom Ranges below The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges C1 C2 and C3 Custom ranges are user defined ranges In the standard range mode any value between 50 ppb 0 05 ppm and 20 000 ppb 20 ppm can be specified as a range In the pg m mg m mode any value between 100 pg m 0 1 mg m and 30 000 g m 30 mg m can be specified as a range In the extended range mode any value between 200 ppb 0 20 ppm and 100 000 ppb 100 ppm can be specified as a range In the pg m mg m mode any value between 500 pg m 0 5 mg m and 150 000 pg m 150 mg m can be specified as a range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges ERE ES hy i HE Ai EN EUH TE Sanat Bone Model 17i Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Averaging Time Custom Ranges Averaging Time 3 16 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges The display shows the current custom range The next line of the display is used to set the range To use the custom full scale range be sure to select it Custom range 1 2 or 3 in the NO NO2 NO NH3 or N Ranges screen For more information about selecting ranges see NO NO2 NOx NH3 and Nt Ranges above e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges gt Custom range 1 2 or 3 The Averaging Tim
100. Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator earlier in this chapter The total GPT airflow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer The Model 17 requires approximately 700 cc min of sample flow and a total GPT airflow of at least 1 5 liters min is recommended Thermo Fisher Scientific Pre Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Pre Calibration Perform the following pre calibration procedure before calibrating the Model 177 For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures see the Operation chapter Note The calibration and calibration check duration times should be long enough to account for the transition purge process when switching from sample to zero and from zero to span This transition time is the time required to purge the existing air from the sample lines external converter and analyzer A Depending on the plumbing configuration and the instrument data from approximately the first minute of a zero calibration or check should be disregarded because of residual sample air Also data from approximately the first minute of a span calibration or check should be disregarded because the span is mixing with the residual zero air A 1 Allow the instrument to warm up and stabilize 2 Be sure the ozonator is ON If the ozonator is not ON a Press to display the Main Menu then choose Instrument Controls gt Ozonator b Press to toggle the ozo
101. E AC IN Figure 6 3 Board Level Connection Diagram External Converter Connector Pin The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table 6 11 can be D esc ri pti ons used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 12 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 16 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram on page 6 19 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 21 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 22 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 23 Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 24 Converter Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 25 Converter Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 26 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label INTF DATA Reference Designator J1 Pin wo N Signal Description Ground RS485 to Interface Board RS485 to Interface Board 10 BASE T J2 mo N Oo wo A WO N Ethernet Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input NC NC Ethernet Input NC NC EXPANSION BD J3 mo N oOo wo A WO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground
102. Model 17i Instruction Manual Chemiluminescence NHs Analyzer Part Number 103260 00 27Jun2014 CE Thermo 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 177 analyzer It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual is organized into the following
103. Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 5 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c
104. Perform leak test Verify calibrator is providing a flow of at least 1 0 LPM Zero or Span will not stabilize Flow rate of the diluted span mix is inadequate Instrument is not drawing in span gas Averaging time is not set correctly Check by pass or atmospheric pressure vent to verify that the zero air system is providing more flow than the instrument is drawing Check sample Flow and Pressure readings on the Diagnostics screen Use an independent flow meter to check flows at the sample inlet and exhaust bulkheads they should match Perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Check the Averaging Time in Main Menu If too high the unit will be slow to stabilize If too low the signal may appear noisy Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 4 Model 17 Instruction Manual Malfunction Possible Cause PMT high voltage power supply failure Action Check the PMT high voltage power supply voltage This voltage should be between 700 and 1200 volts violet wire is positive Calibration Drift Dryer to ozonator depleted Line voltage fluctuations Unstable NO NOz or NH3 source Plugged capillaries Cooler temperature out of capture Reaction chamber temperature out of capture Unstable instrument vacuum Replace Check to see if line voltage is within specifications Replace source gases Cl
105. Replacement on page 7 12 e Fan Replacement on page 7 16 e PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement on page 7 17 e Photomultiplier Tube Replacement on page 7 19 e PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement on page 7 20 e PMT Voltage Adjustment on page 7 21 Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal on page 7 22 e NO2 to NO Converter Replacement on page 7 24 e NH3 Converter Replacement on page 7 25 e Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7 27 e Ozonator Assembly Replacement on page 7 28 e Ozonator Transformer Replacement on page 7 30 e Input Board Replacement on page 7 30 e Input Board Calibration on page 7 32 e DC Power Supply Replacement on page 7 32 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 33 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 36 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 37 e Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement on page 7 38 e Pressure Transducer Calibration on page 7 39 e Temperature Control Board Replacement on page 7 41 e Ambient Temperature Calibration on page 7 42 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 43 e Ammonia Scrubber Replacement on page 7 44 e I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 45 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 46 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 47 e Measuremen
106. Settings gt Erase Log tO Mihei i 5 DHr Py Tame EEA Z rive brea ML miii Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use and a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed This is a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH pikari fant PEL a TA D Choose ltem Type The Choose Item Type submenu displays a list of data that can be loggd for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 DH pikor fant fiie fini i Note The ANALOG INPUTS item is only displayed if the I O Expansion Board option is installed A Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item The sel
107. Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust the streaming data interval The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds 3 36 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Interval Choose Item Signal The Choose Signal screen displays a submenu of the analog output signal group choices Group choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected streaming data item The selected item is shown by lt after it In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low range concentrations RANGE is visible only in auto range mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Select Item gt Concentrations Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Other Measurements Analog Inputs 3 38 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output sig
108. T Supply DH Guided fot PEL fiini i The Auto Manual Mode screen allows selection of the automatic mode NO NO N NO mode manual NO NO mode manual NO or N mode manual N The auto cycle mode switches the three mode solenoid valves automatically on a 10 second cycle so that NO NO2 NO NHs and N concentrations are determined The manual NO mode places the NO mode solenoid valve into the open position and the other valves in the closed position Therefore only the NO concentration is determined The manual NO mode placess the NO mode solenoid valve into the open position and the other valves in the closed position Therefore only the NO concentration is determined The manual N mode places the N mode solenoid valve into the open position and the other valves in the closed position Therefore only the N concentration is determined In the Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu manual modes additional averaging times of 1 2 and 5 seconds are available from the Averaging Times screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Auto Manual Mode ty EUs ETE EE Sasad Beee PME hei Datalogging Settings The Datalogging Settings menu deals with datalogging e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select SREC LREC The Select SREC LREC is used to select short record or long record format for other operations in this menu
109. These commands report the long and short records that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for long and short records To calculate the number of short records per block add 2 to the number of records and then divide by the number of blocks The example below shows that 7 blocks were reserved for long records and the maximum number of long records that can be stored in memory is 1426 Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 1426 recs 7 blocks lrec per srec per These commands report the long and short records logging period The example below shows that the short record logging period is 5 minutes Send srec per Receive srec per 5 min set lrec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the long and short records logging period to value in minutes The example below sets the long record logging period to 15 minutes Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of long and short records stored in the long and short records memory The example below shows that 50 long records have been stored in the memory Model 17 Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 26 Model 177 Instruction Manual Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for long and short records in percent of total m
110. UCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific Number Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 172 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP IP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 1 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 11 e Alarms on page B 15 e Diagnostics on page B 20 e Datalogging on page B 20 e Calibration on page B 28 e Keys Display on page B 31 e Measurement Configuration on page B 33 e Hardware Configuration on page B 37 e Communications Configuration on page B 41 e I O Configuration on page B 46 e Record Layout Definition on page B 51 Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent of the instru
111. a bits Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 8 13 System Description 1 0 Components 1 or 2 stop bit No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB Connector Pin Configurations DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground RS 485 Connection The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground Ethernet Connection An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Fthernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port External Accessory The external accessory connector is used to connect to the external Connector converter in the Model 177 analyzer 8 14 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 177 is available with the following options e Internal Zero Span and Sample Valves on page 9 1 e Ozonator Permeation Dryer on page 9 2 e Teflon Particulate Filter on page
112. age on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 6 Press gt to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 7 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement A 7 38 Model 17 Instruction Manual DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels From the Main Menu press _ _ to scroll to Service press gt to scroll to Analog Input Calibration and press 4 The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 At the Analog Input Cal screen press _ to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press _ Press to scroll to Calibrate Full Scale and press The screen displays the current input voltage for the selected channel Use Jand to enter the source voltage and press amp Jto calibrate the input voltage for the selected cha
113. ain Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument Action ERED CH Pm Tit WRHTEC 5 CH Ci PPP LES Piel bii i Analog Output The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Configuration output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels voltage channels 1 6 and current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing signal to output Note The selected item list is different depending on the AUTO MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings Changing either of these settings will produce a different set of streaming data items If either of these modes are going to be changed on a regular basis then the Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config Ci reinir iL Pi i i Select Output Range The Select Output Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 0 10 V e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configurat
114. an instrument service technician A Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges only A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use Ketonics solvent or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases amp Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual iii About This Manual FCC Compliance FCC Compliance WEEE Symbol Where to Get Help iv Model 17 Instruction Manual Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to c
115. and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Units 3 50 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu CRE RE Te Wi mri E PURE TE Aad Bees PME Oe Feed ELF umi E beet HH Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Decimal Places sec prek pruni PELIR Ep OEH pikap EN EEE TE ueet Beee ETET Aad Bast abe POE Sek eet PE EE E Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the conversion table The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Table Points ERED CH perm bet Eud Pei Eesi bias ini p EH bo bet BPs EEE TE Sanat Bone TOP Fane Bast ade 5 i i Table Point The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Point 1 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 51 Operatio
116. annels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 35 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 35 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB Connector Pin Configurations 0 c ccc 8 14 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB Connector Pin Configuration cccccccceeesceeeeeee 8 14 Table 9 1 Cable Options ccc cccccccecescecsssstesescesssessesteseetsestesessesesseseeneees 9 3 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables oo ccc 9 4 Table 9 3 Mounting Options ssc cocs cocteet ont pseoetestecest seatvet etten tuoi tenntarcusads 9 5 Table B 1 C Link Protocol Commands cceececcccccestesteseeseeseeteetesestesteseesee B 2 Model 177 Instruction Manual xvii Tables xviii Model 177 Instruction Manual Table Baz Averaging Ves is cr ectes ssp tees ppesar peer nutes step daenineree suartweniet aes B 12 Table B 3 Alarm Trigger Values ccccccccscecesesceceesesesceesesesteeseseeteneness B 20 Table B 4 Record Output Formats ccccecccceccecesesteseetesesteseeesestesesteseerenes B 24 Table B 5 Stream Time Values oo ccccecceesesseetesteseesesseesesteseeseeseeseeneseesens B 28 Table B 6 Standard Ranges 42s ta at ee a te a B 34 Table B 7 Extended Ranges cccccccecccscecesesescetesesesesestetesesesteteseseaceesees B 34 Table B 8 Contrast Levels asc vessice cessisratest wrarncvrsersiwrrsinomnvasandatwndan B 38 Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccesesescetetesesceteseseseetesees
117. ard In the converter disconnect all cables connected to the converter interface board and converter temperature control board 5 Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel 6 Remove two screws from the left side of the case viewed from front 7 Remove one screw from the bottom front of the case 8 Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel 9 While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement bench and pull the measurement bench from the rear of the case 10 Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel securing the top of partition panel to the measurement bench and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables 11 Replace the measurement bench by following previous steps in reverse Pump Replaceme Nt Use the following procedure to replace the pump Figure 7 5 To rebuild the pump see Pump Rebuilding in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Equipment Required 110V pump or 220V pump 1 Disconnect the pump power line from the AC power outlet Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement 7 12 Model 17 Instruction Manual
118. as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e lt operating status gt lt SP gt lt error status gt Each of the two lt operating status gt and lt error status gt are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 below lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function it currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e lt 0000000000 gt Model 177 Instruction Manual D 5 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Measurements reported in response to DA command Single Range Mode Dual Auto Range Mode D 6 Model 177 Instruction Manual Example Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt
119. ate screen is used to change the I O relay to either normally open or normally closed e Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is tied to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarm or non alarm to choose from 3 42 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument State ERED CH Pm Tit WH mid PREDER ie Pay AG Lf bi Alarms The Alarms status screen allows the user to select the alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt after it The I O BD STATUS alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed ZERO CHK CAL and SPAN CHK CAL are only present if the autozero span check is enabled e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms RCRUSE CHS mito WH mnie E PURE TE Aad bee PUG Fed he bo Feed Edad PDE E Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Non Alarm The Non Alarm status screen allows the user to select the non alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt
120. ately 750 C Check that Converter Heater LED on temperature control board is on if not check connections to converter interface board and replace temperature control board Check that voltage to the heater is 115 VAC Check heater connector pins for continuity Alarm Pressure Pressure high Check tubing going to pressure sensor Check the pump for a tear in the diaphragm replace with pump repair kit if necessary Refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check that capillaries are properly installed and O rings are in good shape Replace if necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Alarm Message Possible Cause Action Pressure low Check plumbing for leaks Check electrical cabling between pressure sensor and measurement interface board Replace pressure sensor Alarm Flow Flow low Check sample capillaries in the converter 0 010 inch ID for blockage Replace as necessary If using sample particulate filter make sure it is not blocked Disconnect sample particulate filter from the sample bulkhead if flow increases replace the filter Flow high When delivering zero air or gas to the instrument use an atmospheric dump Alarm Ozonator Flow Ozone flow low Check ozone capillary in the analyzer 0 010 inch ID for blockage Replace as necessary Alarm Zero Check Instru
121. ause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense amp The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE and the a equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 A Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Contents Pt OC CUI OIN sisccsissccsdasssivct ccussdtinsanndtdsnassaronunotatanassudnaniantineniaandsestanecaasdamonertuatats 1 1 P inciple Ol Operation annoa anea e ek assests el 1 2 SPECICA LIONS riais lacie sasat irea e r hus a ietie eae eesis issa 1 3 Installation eaaa a aaa bated susatuadncdanoaatncatads 2 1 DNE ooo SR aged E a A R a Od ee 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection 2 22 castaciaieetveiensdewceetaitawtineeniccne 2 1 Setup Proceduren nn scars ced nce tetra cake weet eecnas EE taeda aes 2 2 Connecting External Devices s coieascndiaecctaseinieicei deeataereates 2 6 Terminal Board PCB Asset BUGS spend pate sot cata
122. ay can only be changed when DHCP is OFF For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway PE mh ds ara Rri a ia i Host Name The host name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name aa pe a Taic 1 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A DH Guided Piet Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state or instrument parameter for the relay selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings EH piker E E a EA Logic State The Logic St
123. c 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i lt 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptrt rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr Oxff rlecount Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration To convert this data into a BMP for use with windows it needs to be turned into a 4BPP as that is the smallest windows can display Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data i e the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc screen This command is meant for backward compatibility on the C series Screen information is reported using the iscreen command above Send screen Receive screen This is an I series Instrument Screen Information not available range no high range nh3 range no2 high range nt range nox low range no range nh3 low range no2 range nt low range nox high range no low range nh3 high range no2 low range nt high range nox These commands report NO NO2 NO NH and N range in single range mode or the high and low ranges in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can
124. cece Ora eee patd 2 6 VO Terminal Boardiesssasie deat tele ted heard ethane Ses eee ec 2 6 D O Terminal Board sites tsa cata e a Mem oa atta 2 8 25 Pin Terminal BO ard srsti biirr iniaeth 2 9 Startup an a a a a a ei 2 11 Operationisrensriisninan aaa Na Ae A eaa 3 1 Displayen hann evel theta sen aon ae nl aa 3 1 PS AUER 1S s sceniniai ii ect sa ocak rc Sect ede enc ntee ROR 3 2 Soft Keys areni A Nites dMoeaeoseudiuncoietadens Aeris 3 3 Software OVEVIEW ma teie e e OE Ta a Ze 3 4 Power pr SCreeit lt asesss ets nainen pini aaa 3 6 R n Screener a a 3 6 Mam Ment orsta eaeh aria ire E Aee e ir EAA EARE R 3 7 Range Menu henti NE E O 3 8 Single Range Moders renin a iiaeie i R RE EE uses 3 8 Dual Range Modes cao de Mt a ae ede e 3 9 Auto Range Moden cbe csc cues ee ea he ee oa 3 11 Gas ATES ses ess eed ita Reps rnan a ioe R a aaa a a 3 13 NO NO NOs NH3 and N Ranges sesescesseeceessecececeeseecaees 3 13 Set Cust ni RANEES cones nt roir a iing neie derri hanens 3 15 Guston Ranges no i a E EA A Na 3 16 Ay ragino WMS sess ous rano na a a ead 3 16 Calibration Factors Menu ssesssssssssesesesesesssesesesrersssesesesssesssssssesssesee 3 17 NO NO and N Backgrounds 2 2 62 ce teste teeta 3 18 NO NO NOx NHs and N Coefficients eeseseeeereeeeeeneeeees 3 19 Reset User Calibration Default c ce 2 csieieitiatisiaeiainetaaeis 3 20 Calibration Menu biterse esau t siase psani etl 3 20 Calibrate NO NO and N Backgrounds s s
125. cement Ozonator Transformer Replacement Input Board Replacement 7 30 Model 17 Instruction Manual Unplug the ozonator from the ozonator transformer by lifting the ozonator straight up To install the ozonator follow the previous steps in reverse Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator transformer Figure 7 15 Equipment Required Ozonator transformer Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Remove the ozonator assembly as described in Ozonator Assembly Replacement Disconnect the plug connecting the ozonator transformer to the measurement interface board OZONATOR connector Remove the four screws holding the ozonator transformer to the ozonator bracket and remove the ozonator transformer To install the ozonator transformer follow the previous steps in reverse Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the input board Figure 7 16 Equipment Required Input board Thermo Fisher Scientific
126. creens below show the range menu in single range mode and dual auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed For more information about the single dual and auto range modes see Single Range Mode Dual Range Mode and Auto Range Mode below e Inthe Main Menu choose Range EHO gies oOo Pike fiini i Single Range Mode 1n the single range mode while in NO NO N mode the NO NO NOs N and NH channels each have one range one averaging time and one span coefficient By default the four analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 2 for channels and pin connections Single range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 72 3 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Dual Range Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu 0 37 5 18 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 NO Analog Output 2 33 3 NO Analog Output 3 15 5 NO Analog Output 4 34 7 NH Analog Output 5 17 g None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog out
127. ctB 14 Relay7_ContactB 3 Relay2_ContactA 15 Relay8_ContactA 4 Relay2_ContactB 16 Relay8_ContactB 5 Relay3_ContactA 17 Relay9_ContactA 6 Relay3_ContactB 18 Relay9_ContactB 7 Relay4_ContactA 19 Relay10_ContactA 8 Relay4_ContactB 20 Relay10_ContactB 9 Relay5_ContactA 21 not used 10 Relay5_ContactB 22 24V 11 Relay6_ContactA 23 not used 2 8 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 12 Relay6_ContactB 24 24V 25 Pin Terminal Board The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail E Assembled Connector Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Table 2 3 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 lOut1 13 Analog_In1 2 Isolated ground 14 Analog_In2 3 lOut2 15 Analog_In3 4 Isolated ground 16 Ground 5 lOut3 17 Analog_In4 6 Isolated ground 18 Analog_In5 7 lOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 Isolated ground 20 Ground 9 lOut5 21 Analog_In7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Connecting External Devices Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 10 Isolated ground 22 Analog_In8 11 lOut6 23 Ground 12 Isolated ground 24 Ground 2 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Startup Sta rt
128. cted record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging ERE CHa Pr Tit HE E Wi hid PPP LES Ea Lii i The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the record format srec or lrec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Logging Period Min ERED CH perm Be Ebb Eust His CH bo bet Bs EE EE Sanat Bone EY Fane Bast ade 5 i iNi i The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of each record type for both short records and long records Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both short records and long records Model 17i Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at th
129. d 5 To install the converter interface board follow previous steps in reverse Converter Interface Board Figure 7 26 Replacing the Converter Interface Board SN SS Ne Figure 7 27 Rear Panel Converter Interface Board Connector Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 7 Instruction Manual 7 53 Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Front panel board amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following previous steps in reverse LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 _ Retaining Screw Front Panel Board Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 lt lt Bottom Support Figure 7 28 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 54 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific LCD Module Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Servicing LCD
130. d Col 3 Select oOo N oon A wo N Keypad Col 4 Select LCD BACKLIGHT J4 5V Supply 2 NC 6 20 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 3 Ground Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator EXPANSION I O J1 Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Oo a N O o A N Analog Voltage Input 7 oO Analog Voltage Input 8 a Ground NC Current Output Return Ground Current Output 1 Current Output Return Current Output 2 Current Output Return N N gt gt N co loo N o Sz gt w N Current Output 3 N Current Output Return N pa Current Output 4 N N Current Output Return N oo Current Output 5 N BS Current Output Return N o1 Current Output 6 5V 24V 24V MOTHER BD J2 wo no gt Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Motherboard 8 RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference P
131. d Layout The Erec Lrec Srec layouts contain the following Definition e A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the Erec Layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel displays Values are read in using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier Format Specifier for The first line of the Layout response is the scanf like parameter list for ASCII Responses parsing the fields from an ASCII ERec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically
132. d for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device Ds 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP a MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Thermo Fisher Scientific Read Inputs MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 Force Write Single Coil 0x05 0x06 Read Exception Status If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Functio
133. d replace as necessary 6 Check capillary for particulate deposits Clean or replace as necessary 7 Replace capillary in holder making sure the O ring is around the capillary before inserting it into the body 8 Replace Cajon fitting Note that the Cajon fitting should be tightened slightly more than hand tight 9 Reconnect tubing to top of fittings being careful to insert ferrule and O ring properly and tighten knurled nut finger tight 10 Re install the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning A Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning 5 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual 11 Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the thermoelectric cooler fins Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Turn the instrument off and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the analyzer cover 3 Locate the PMT cooler Figure 7 2 and Figure 7 8 4 Blow off the cooler fins using clean pressurized air It may be more convenient to vacuum the cooler fins In either case make su
134. decimal d or floating point f or binary b number Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format e g a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character can precede the precision specifier this causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be
135. del 177 outputs NO NO NOx NH and N concentrations to the front panel display and NO NOx and NHs concentrations to the analog outputs and logged data by default the other concentrations may be added by the user and also makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection TL T ae Electroni Figure 1 1 Model 177 Flow Schematic Specifications Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the Model 172 Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 1 1 Model 17i Specifications Preset ranges 0 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 ppm 0 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 30 mg m Extended ranges 0 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 ppm 0 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 150 mg m Custom ranges 0 0 05 to 20 ppm 0 0 2 to 100 ppm in extended ranges 0 0 1 to 30 mg m 0 0 5 to 150 mg m in extended ranges Zero roise 0 5 ppb RMS 120 second averaging time Lower detectable limit 1 ppb Model 17 Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Specifications 1 4 Model 177 Instruction Manual Zero drift 24 hour 1 ppb Span drift 24 hour 1 of full scale Response time 0 90 120 seconds 10 second averaging time Linearity 1 of full scale Sample flow rate 600 cc min Operating temperature 15 35 C may be safely operated over
136. difference between the screens are the words High and Low to indicate which range is displayed The example below shows the NO range screen in single mode For more information about the dual and auto range modes see Single Range Mode Dual Range Mode and Auto Range Mode earlier in this chapter Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Range Menu Table 3 5 lists the available operating ranges Table 3 6 lists the extended ranges When switching from standard to extended ranges the PMT voltage must be readjusted For more information about readjusting the PMT voltage see Chapter 7 Servicing e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt NO NO2 NOx NH3 or Nt Range Cu ied 5 Fike iisi i Table 3 5 Standard Ranges ppb ppm pgm mgm 50 0 05 100 0 1 100 0 10 200 0 2 200 0 20 500 0 5 500 0 50 1 000 1 0 1 000 1 00 2 000 2 0 2 000 2 00 5 000 5 0 5 000 5 00 10 000 10 0 10 000 10 00 20 000 20 0 20 000 20 00 30 000 30 0 C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C3 c3 c3 3 14 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Custom Ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 3 6 Extended Ranges Operation Range Menu ppb ppm pgm mgm 200 0 2 500 0 5 500 0 5 1 000 1 1 000 1 2 000 2 2 000 2 5 000 5 5 000 5 10 000 10 10 000 10 20 000 20 20 000 20 50 000 50 50 000 50 100 000 100 100 000 100 150 000 150 C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2
137. ds report the list of current selections for long record logging data short record logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The example below shows the list for streaming data output Model 17 Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 22 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable x x time 1 1 no 2 2 no2 3 3 nox 4 18 intt 5 25 pres 6 26 smplf er xy Ir xy sr xy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec lrec srec format format command These commands report the last long and short records stored or the dynamic data record In the example below the command requests a long record with no checksum in ASCII format with text For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send lro1 Receive lro1 22 22 03 24 00 flags 50010000 no 5 150E 03 no2 2 560E 03 nox 7 710E 03 nh3 0 000E 06 nt 7 710E 03 intt 30 967 rctt 49 857 pmtt 3 113 convt 328 932 cvext 746 667 pres 86 554 pmtv 825 101 smplf 0 551 erec This command returns a brief description of the main operating conditions at the time the command is issued i e dynamic data The example below shows a typical response The format is defined by the current settings of format and erec format commands For details on how to decode the flag fields w
138. e 8 4 Model 177 Instruction Manual Cooler The reaction chamber is where the sample reacts with ozone and produces excited NO that gives off a photon of energy when it decays The reaction chamber is heated and controlled to approximately 50 C in order to ensure the greatest instrument stability The sample and ozone flow capillaries and a thermistor sensor are also housed in on the reaction chamber assembly The optical filter housed in the reaction chamber limits the spectral region viewed by the detector and eliminates possible interferences due to other chemiluminescent reactions The pressure transducer measures the reaction chamber pressure The sample flow sensor located at the reaction chamber inlet measures the sample flow into the reaction chamber The Ozonator generates the necessary ozone concentration required for the chemiluminescent reaction The ozone reacts with the NO in the ambient air sample to produce the electronically excited NO2 molecules The ozonator flow switch located at the ozonator inlet completes an electrical safety circuit when air flows through the sensor to the ozonator If airflow stops the flow sensor breaks the electrical circuit to the ozonator and shuts it off to prevent the ozonator from overheating The Photomultiplier tube PMT provides the infrared sensitivity required to detect the NO luminescence resulting from the reaction of the ozone with the ambient air sample Optical energy
139. e B 16 alarm conc no max Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum value B 16 alarm conc no min Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B 16 alarm conc no2 max Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum B 16 value alarm conc no2 min Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B 16 alarm conc noxmax _ Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum B 16 value alarm conc noxmin Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B 16 alarm conc nt max Reports sets current N concentration alarm maximum value B 16 alarm conc nt min Reports sets current N concentration alarm minimum value B 16 alarm converter Reports sets NO converter temperature alarm maximum B 17 temp max value alarm converter Reports sets NO converter temperature alarm minimum B 17 temp min value alarm cooler temp Reports sets PMT cooler temperature alarm maximum value B 17 max alarm cooler temp Reports sets PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value B 17 min alarm ext conv temp Reports sets NH external converter temperature alarm B 17 max maximum value alarm ext conv temp Reports sets NH3 external converter temperature alarm B 17 min minimum value alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm maximum value B 18 max alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm minimum value B 18 min alarm pressure max Reports sets pressure alarm maximum value B 18 alarm pressure min Reports sets pr
140. e B 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 38 Model 177 Instruction Manual Send contrast Receive contrast 5 50 set contrast evel This command sets the screen s level of contrast according to Table B 8 The example below sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 5 Receive set contrast 5 ok Table B 8 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 WO wali asi oy amp w Po conv set temp This command reports the temperature that the NO converter is set to The example below reports that the converter temperature is set to 325 C Send conv set temp Receive conv set temp 325 deg C set conv set temp value This command sets the temperature that the NO2 converter is set to where value is an integer representing degrees C The example below sets the converter temperature to 325 C Send set conv set temp 325 Receive set conv set temp 325 ok date This command reports the current date The example below reports the date as December 1 2004 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Send date Receive date 12 01 04 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The example below sets the date to December 1 2004 Send
141. e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select SREC LREC RRS E CHS mito WH mri E PORE TE Aad Bee PME oe Feed kr d Ea a A E Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the start point to view the logged data by number of records or date and time e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select SREC or LREC gt View Logged Data he EEE Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the starting point to display the number of records back to view The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Ehe EEE Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 JUN 2005 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 JUN 2005 10 01 3 28 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu RCRSE Crs mito CH es bet ETTE T Suad beoe Pi Sad kr d T E E a H E Erase Log The Erase Log is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type not all short records and long records e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging
142. e Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 then press to save the value 6 Press to return to the previous screen 7 Press to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service nress gt CE Josus Analog Input Calibration and press Le 2 The Analog Input Cal screen displays Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press to scroll to a channel and press J 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press e The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 5 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and 8 put p press to calibrate the input volt
143. e The selected item list is different depending on the AUTO MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings Changing either of these settings will produce a different set of streaming data items If either of these modes are going to be changed on a regular basis then the user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Select Channel gt Choose Signal to Output DH pikari E a E S EA 3 48 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 3 8 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations None Other Measurements None Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs None NO single auto range Internal Temp Analog Input 1 if 1 0 Expansion board installed NO single auto range Chamber Temp Analog Input 2 if 1 0 Expansion board installed NO single auto range NHs single auto range Cooler Temp NO Converter Temp Analog Input 3 if 1 0 Expansion board installed Analog Input 4 if 1 0 Expansion board installed N single auto range External Converter Temp Analog Input 5 if 1 0 Expansion board installed LO NO dual Chamber Pressure Analog Input 6 if I O Expansion board installed LO NO dual Flow Analog Input 7 if 1 0 Expa
144. e ZERO bulkhead in a Model 177 equipped with the zero span and sample solenoid valve option 2 Allow the instrument to sample zero gas until a stable reading is obtained on the NO NO N NO2 and NH channels then record the zero readings Unless the zero has changed by more than 0 010 ppm it is recommended that the zero not be adjusted If an adjustment Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Zero and Span Check larger than this is indicated due to a change in zero reading the instrument should be re calibrated Attach a supply of known concentration of NO NO usually generated via an NIST traceable NO working standard and a GPT system and NH to the SAMPLE bulkhead or SPAN bulkhead for instruments equipped with the zero span and sample solenoid valve option on the rear panel Allow the instrument to sample the calibration gas until a stable reading is obtained on the NO NO N NO and NH channels If the calibration has changed by more than 10 the instrument should be re calibrated When the calibration check has been completed record the NO NO N NO and NH values Reconnect the analyzer sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead Model 177 Instruction Manual 4 19 Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed on the instrument to ensure prop
145. e defines a time period 10 to 300 seconds over which NO NO2 NO NH3 and N measurements are taken The average concentration of the NO NO2 NOx NH and N readings are calculated for that time period The front panel display and analog outputs are updated every 10 seconds for averaging times between 10 and 300 seconds An averaging time of 10 seconds for example means that the average concentration of the last 10 seconds will be output at each update An averaging time of 300 seconds means that the moving average concentration of the last 300 seconds will be output at each update Therefore the lower the averaging time the faster the front panel display and analog outputs respond to concentration changes Longer averaging times are typically used to smooth output data The Averaging Time screen for the single range mode is shown below In the dual and auto range modes an Averaging Time Menu is displayed before the averaging time screens This additional menu is needed because the dual and auto range modes have two averaging times high and low The Averaging Time screen functions the same way in the single dual and auto range modes The following averaging times are available 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds Additional averaging times are available in NO and NO modes 1 2 and 5 seconds For more information about the manual mode see Auto Manual Mode later in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Opera
146. e end of the interval e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment Communication The Communication Settings menu is used with communications control Settings and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings 3 34 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Baud Rate ORME meh dt PPP LES mie AG Wp TP ORF Ect pihe inini i Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more of the same instruments are connected to one computer Valid Instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 17 has a default Instrument ID of 17 For more information about the Instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID EA ED Ya 5 i dro pH Tied PRECEDES ime F
147. e of the display shows the user specified ozonator setting Under most conditions the control line status and ozonator set status are the same However as a safety precaution the microprocessor can override the user specified ozonator setting This occurs only if the ozonator flow doesn t indicate any flow or if the NO converter temperature is below the minimum alarm limit In this case an alarm is activated and the ozonator is turned off This is done to prevent the ozonator from overheating which will result in permanent damage to the ozonator or if the converter temperature drops below the minimum limit which reduces the effectiveness of the ozone destruct Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 26 It is possible however to override the ozonator shut off due to converter temperature being out of range by setting the ozonator safety OFF in the Service Menu Note The ozonator must be ON to obtain NO NO2 NO NHs3 and N readings As an additional safety precaution a lit LED mounted on the measurement interface board indicates that the ozonator is on A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Ozonator PMT Supply The PMT Supply screen is used to turn the PMT power supply on or off Auto Manual Mode Model 17 Instruction Manual This is useful in a troubleshooting situation e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt PM
148. e partially corrected NO value to yield an uncorrected NO value The NO value is then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NO reading The corrected NO reading is added to the corrected NO reading to yield a fully corrected NO value The corrected NO value is subtracted from the partially corrected N value to yield an uncorrected NH value The NH value is then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NH reading Finally the corrected NH reading is added to the corrected NO reading to yield a fully corrected N value The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the NO NO2 NOx NH3 and N Thermo Fisher Scientific Electronics Motherboard External Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Electronics concentrations simultaneously The display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time The analog output ranges are user selectable via software The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range The defaults are calculated by dividing the data values by the full scale range for each of the three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user selected output range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user t
149. e reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Capillary Temp ip priori fat PEL fiini i Min and Max Capillary The Minimum Capillary Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum capillary temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum capillary temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Capillary Temp gt Min or Max PME kee EE EE Cooler Temperature The Cooler Temperature screen displays the current cooler temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 40 to 10 C If the cooler temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Cooler Temp 3 64 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Min and Max Cooler Temperature Limits Converter Temperature Min and Max Converter Temperature Limits Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu The Minimum Cooler Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum cooler temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum cooler temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Cooler Temp gt Min or Max
150. e reading to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Zero The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the P pressure sensor calibration span point Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be disconnected so the sensor is reading ambient pressure before performing the span calibration The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Span Thermo Fisher Scientific Restore Default Pressure Calibration Operation Service Menu The Restore Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the pressure calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Set Defaults Flow Calibration Calibrate Flow Zero Thermo Fisher Scientific The Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the flow sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The flow calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu cho
151. e received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the lt address gt does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode instrument id 5 lt STX gt STO05 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command DA initiates a data transfer from the instrument The Query Command instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range DA mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA005 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt SP gt 5 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Address and the command is term
152. ean or replace Check that the cooler is about 3 C If not contact factory Check that reaction chamber temperature is about 50 C If not check that the thermistor on the reaction chamber is connected to the termperature control board and the heater is connected to the temperature control board Check pump s efficiency diaphragm leaks etcetera NH scrubber s Replace depletion Excessive Noise Defective or low Check PMT voltage sensitivity PMT Defective input board or BNC connection Defective cooler Defective ozonator Noise pick up by recorder or data logger Unplug power cord Remove PMT Install known good PMT Plug in power cord Check performance Identify defective component and replace Check cooler temperature approximately 3 C Replace ozonator assembly Check analog output cable shielding and grounding Try to localize source of noise by comparing analog signal to data collected thorugh RS 232 or Ethernet Non linear response Incorrect calibration source Leak in sample probe line Verify accuracy of multipoint calibration source gas Check for variable dilution Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Leak within the Model 177 Problem with input board range switching Defective PMT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check for loose fittings in both converter and analyzer module G
153. ech Bayern Hessen Protocol c scsssssesseceeseessessesseseeneeneenes D 1 Serial Communication Parameters 5 4 25 siccissssharnbuaaceesmaakenwe D 1 TCP Communication Parameters ssseessesesssseesessereesseseesssseesssseeee D 2 Instrument Address nieni niana asea aai Aa Sere En Tore D 2 Abbreviations Used cesta oat cas edad teh e a RE D 2 Basic Command Struct re sssirsisiisserseisriserierrsisssiseisecasseyeiddinssesin ses D 2 Block Checksum BOC srunhas foe atte a a tee cdots D 3 Greysitec lis Commands aeie e anaE cous R E TEA ehir D 3 Instrument Control Command ST ssessssssesssssssssssseesseseessssressssrses D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA sssesesssereeeerereseee D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command 00 D 6 Model 177 Instruction Manual xiii Contents Single RAB eM GAE as sss5i4 caeacadsteneds sheaueasantcs es shendeaodatepelsancaeasacrss D 6 Dual Auto Range Modesi 4 2 c 0ed aueiadeiivetnan Miaenaile D 6 Operating and Error Status cise it del Acid ea anes D 7 xiv Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Model 177 Flow Schematic 0 0ccccccccscssesceseseesesteseseetesteeeeenes 1 3 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 0 0 c cccccccccecesesescetesesesteteceteseseees 2 2 Figure 2 2 Model 177 and Converter Module Rear Panels 0 cccccce 2 3 Figure 2 3 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing
154. ected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below RANGE is visible only in auto range mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Select Field gt Concentrations 3 30 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item The selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Select Field gt Other Measurements ay ped Py Brass irom Rri myi ie i E ii Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs Commit Content The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the output signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that is tied to the selected field item The selected item is
155. ee the flags command Send lrec 100 5 Receive lrec 100 5 21 40 03 24 00 flags 50010000 no 5 150E 03 no2 2 560 03 nox 7 710E 03 nh3 0 000E 06 nt 7 710E 03 intt 31 015 rctt 49 857 pm pres 86 850 pm 21 41 03 24 00 flags 50010000 no 5 nox 7 710E 03 rctt 49 857 pm pres 86 850 pm 21 42 03 24 00 flags 50010000 no 5 nox 7 710E 03 rctt 49 857 pm pres 86 850 pm 21 43 03 24 00 flags 50010000 no 5 nox 7 710E 03 rctt 49 857 pm pres 86 850 pm 21 44 03 24 00 nox 7 710E 03 rctt 49 857 pm pres 86 850 pm tt 2 874 convt 329 194 cvext 757 436 tv 824 731 smplf 0 559 150E 03 no2 2 560 03 nh3 0 000E 06 nt 7 710E 03 intt 31 015 tt 2 874 convt 329 194 cvext 757 436 tv 824 731 smplf 0 559 150E 03 no2 2 560 03 nh3 0 000E 06 nt 7 710E 03 intt 31 015 tt 2 874 convt 329 194 cvext 757 436 tv 824 731 smplf 0 559 150E 03 no2 2 560 03 nh3 0 000E 06 nt 7 710E 03 intt 31 015 tt 2 874 convt 329 194 cvext 757 436 tv 824 731 smplf 0 559 flags 50010000 no 5 nh3 0 000E 06 nt 7 71 tt 2 874 convt 329 1 150E 03 no2 2 560 03 LOE 03 intt 31 015 194 cvext 757 436 tv 824 731 smplf 0 559 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging where pmtv PMT Voltage pmtt PMT Temperature intt Internal Temperature cptt Capillary Chamber Temperature rctt Reaction Chamber Temperature no2 cnvt NO Converter Temperature nh3 cnvt NH Converter Temperature safl Sam
156. emory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for long and short records to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The example below sets the memory allocation for long records to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logging data memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the long record short record or streaming data list The example below copies the current list in scratch pad into the long records list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok set copy lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the long record short record or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current long record short record or streaming data lists The example below copies the current list of long records into the scratch pad Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok sp field number This command rep
157. en and begin automatic calibration PELAR Fyn mT beno pH Evi ETET hei Bat abe POE Saek come PE EE E Input Frequency Display The Input Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input board gain This may be used as a troubleshooting tool for the input board The gain setting and test mode are reset upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Input Frequency Display e Press to leave warning screen e Use f Jand _ J to toggle the test signal and bypass the PMT e Use e Jand gt to change the gain between 1 10 and 100 3 78 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Temperature Calibration Analog Output Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific The Temperature calibration screen allows the user to view and set the ambient temperature sensor calibration Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value The temperature calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu is a selection of 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels to calibrate and allows the user to select the calibratio
158. en is used to view and set the initial date and time of the zero span check Once the initial zero span check is performed the date and time of the next zero span check is calculated and displayed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Next Time Period Hours The Zero Span Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between zero span checks Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable To turn the zero span check off set the period to 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Period HR Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Calibration Menu Zero Span Purge The Zero Duration Minutes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by Duration Minutes the instrument The span and purge duration screens look and function the same way as the zero duration screen and are used to set how long the span gas and sample gas are sampled by the instrument Durations between 0 and 99 minutes are acceptable Each time a zero span check occurs the zero check is done first followed by the span check To perform just a zero check set the span and purge duration screen to 0 off The same applies to perform just a span or purge check e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span or Purge Duration Min PP Cue mi Ciera Haat abe POES one Pi EE EE Zero Span Averaging The Zero Span Averaging Time screen allows the user to adjust the Time zero s
159. endant on the current version Send program no Receive program no iSeries 17i 01 00 01 074 set layout ack This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the layout has changed Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channels where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The example below reports current output channel 4 to the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 12 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 12 The example below sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration Table B 12 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel da
160. enoid Valve ccccccccceceeetesteteeteteseeeee 7 28 Figure 7 15 Replacing the Ozonator ASS MDIY ccccccecececeteeeteeeteeee 7 29 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Input Board oo ccc cece ceteesestetesesesteteseseees 7 31 Figure 7 17 Replacing the DC Power Supply cccccccececeeeteeeteeee 7 33 Figure 7 18 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins eee 7 34 Figure 7 19 Replacing the Pressure Transducer 7 39 Figure 7 20 Replacing the Thermistor ccc ccececesesceteesesteteesesteteseseaes 7 42 Figure 7 21 Replacing the Ammonia Scrubbers c cccccececeseeeseeeseeeeeens 7 45 Figure 7 22 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 0 cccceee 7 46 Figure 7 23 Rear Panel Board Connectors 00 ccecccccceccsceescesestesesceseeteseeens 7 46 Figure 7 24 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board ccceeeee 7 49 Figure 7 25 Replacing the Flow Transducer c cccccecccecesesescetesesesteteseseees 7 50 Figure 7 26 Replacing the Converter Interface Board 00 0c cence 7 53 Figure 7 27 Rear Panel Converter Interface Board Connector 0 00 7 53 Figure 7 28 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 54 Figure 8 1 Analyzer Module Hardware Component 0 cccccccscesteseeteeees 8 2 Figure 8 2 Converter Module Hardware Components cccccccceceeeeee 8 3 Figure 9 1 Flow Diagram Zero Span Option 0 2 0 ccccccccecececesesceseseeteeeeeeee 9 2
161. ent NO NO2 NO NH N ranges e Replaceable NO and NH converter core assembly e User selectable digital input output capabilities e Standard communications features include RS232 485 and Ethernet e C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen and streaming data protocols For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Principle of Operation on page 1 2 e Specifications on page 1 3 Model 177 Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation Principle of Operation 1 2 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this NH analyzer We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer For more information on servicing see Chapter 7 Servicing The Model 17 uses the light producing reaction of nitric oxide NO with ozone O3 as its basic principle Specifically NO gt NO NH gt NO NO 0 gt NO 0 hv The sample is drawn into the Model 172 by an external pump After it reaches the reaction chamber it mixes with ozone which is generated by the internal ozonator The last chemical reaction above then takes place This reaction produces a characteristic luminescence with intensity proportional to the concentration
162. eplacement Parts Cleaning the Outside Case A Visual Inspection and Cleaning Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement Capillary Inspection and Replacement 5 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the labels on the case Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A The instrument should be inspected occasionally for obvious visible defects such as loose connectors loose fittings cracked or clogged Teflon lines and excessive dust or dirt accumulation Dust and dirt can accumulate in the instrument and can cause overheating or component failure Dirt on the components prevents efficient heat dissipation and may provide conducting paths for electricity The best way to clean the inside of the instrument is to first carefully vacuum all accessible areas and then blow away the remaining dust with low pressure compressed air Use a soft paint brush or cloth to remove stubborn dirt Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator air feed drying column Remove the drying column from the connector DRY AIR bulkhead on the rear panel of the instrument 2 Replace spent absorbent material indicating Drierite or silica gel with new or regenerated material 3 Reinstall the drying column to the DRY AIR bulkhead 4 Perform a Zero Span c
163. er operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This chapter includes the following maintenance information and replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Replacement Parts on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Visual Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 2 e Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement on page 5 2 e Capillary Inspection and Replacement on page 5 2 e Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement on page 5 4 e Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 6 e Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 6 e Pump Rebuilding on page 5 7 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A Model 177 Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts R
164. eration Alarms Menu Min and Max Internal The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum internal temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum internal temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp gt Min or Max Wi hid Chamber Temperature The Chamber Temperature screen displays the current chamber temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 45 to 55 C If the chamber temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Chamber Temp i hyd Pin Pit Min and Max Chamber The Minimum Chamber Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum chamber temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum chamber temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Chamber Temp gt Min or Max ERED CH MP Tit ENF ned Peene ETET Aad Bat abe EE Fasad enaal Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Alarms Menu Capillary Temperature The Capillary Temperature screen displays the current capillary temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 45 to 55 C If the capillary temperatur
165. ermocouple Pos Input External Ambient Temperature Thermocouple Neg Input PRES FP WoO N Pressure Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V TEMP CTRL J4 oOo oO A WO N Conv Temp Btm Input Ground 15V Converter Control Output Conv Temp Top Input 15V FAN FAN2 J5 24V Ground 24V Ground Model 177 Instruction Manual 6 25 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 26 Model 17 Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator S C BYP J7 24V 2 S C BYP Solenoid Control 2 C CAL J8 24V 2 Z C CAL Solenoid Control FLOW J9 Flow Sensor Input 2 Ground 3 15V 4 15V 5 Ground Table 6 11 Converter Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label INTF Reference Designator J1 Pin oOo oO A WO N Signal Description Bench Temperature Input Ground 15V Converter Heater On Off Converter Temperature Input 15V AC IN BENCH J3 FP Ww N AC Input A AC Input B Bench Heater AC Output Bench Heater AC Return Ground Bench Thermistor CONVERTER J4 wo N Chassis Ground Converter Heater AC Output Converter Heater AC Return CONV TC J5 Converter Thermocouple TC Neg Converter Thermocouple TC Pos J6 Not Used Do not connect Not Used Do not connect Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Service Locatio
166. ernal temp max These commands report the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the internal temperature alarm minimum value is 15 0 C Send alarm internal temp min Receive alarm internal temp min 15 0 deg C set alarm internal temp min value set alarm internal temp max value These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 35 0 C Send set alarm internal temp max 35 Receive set alarm internal temp max 35 ok alarm pressure min alarm pressure max These commands report the pressure alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the pressure alarm minimum value is 150 mmHg Send alarm pressure min Receive alarm pressure min 150 0 mmHg set alarm pressure min value set alarm pressure max value These commands set the pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The example below sets the pressure alarm maximum value to 290 mmHg Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms Send set alarm pressure max 290 Receive set alarm pressure max 290 ok alarm sample fl
167. es 5 9 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 9 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 10 Figure 6 3 Board Level Connection Diagram External Converter 6 11 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap occas 7 4 Figure 7 2 Analyzer Module Component Layout 0 c ccccceccceeeceeeteeeeteeee 7 8 Figure 7 3 Converter Module Component Layout 0 ccccccccecesceeetee eee 7 9 Figure 7 4 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition BEIN eee E E RENE ener met ea Det EPRENE E eae ene 7 10 Figure 7 5 Replacing the PUMP c cccccccecsesesseteseseeceeseseeteeseseeceneseseees 7 12 Figure 7 6 Vacuum Pump Head Plate and Motor View uu cece 7 15 Figure 7 7 Replacing the Fan ccc ceceesescetesesestetesesestetesssesteeseseaes 7 16 Figure 7 8 PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber 0 cccccccecesteeeseeeeeee 7 18 Figure 7 9 Replacing the PMT ou ccceescscetesesestetesesestetesesesteeseseees 7 19 Figure 7 10 Replacing the PMT HVPS o on 7 2 Figure 7 11 Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chambet ccc0 7 23 Figure 7 12 NO to NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly 00cccc 7 25 Model 17 Instruction Manual xv Figures xvi Model 177 Instruction Manual Figure 7 13 NH Converter Heater Core ASSeMbDIy cccecceccececeteeeteeee 7 27 Figure 7 14 Replacing the Sol
168. escriptions Connector Label Reference Designator oOo aoa N O o gt Signal Description 5V Ground Measurement Frequency Output Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage SPI Input SPI Clock SPI Board Select Table 6 9 Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label INTERFACE Reference Designator J1 Pin oOo oO A WO N Signal Description Bench Temperature Input Ground 15V Converter Heater On Off Converter Temperature Input 15V_PWR AC INPUT J2 AC HOT AC NEUT BENCH J3 FP WoO N Bench Heater AC Output Bench Heater AC Return Ground Bench Thermistor CONVERTER w N Ground Converter Heater AC Output Converter Heater AC Return CONV TC SS TEMP 6 24 Model 17 Instruction Manual J5 J6 Converter Thermocouple TC Converter Thermocouple TC SS Temperature Range Jumper A SS Temperature Range Jumper B Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Table 6 10 Converter Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label EXT RS485 INTERFACE Reference Designator J1 Pin Oo a N on A OO N a a a a a ol gt o N Signal Description RS485 from Analyzer RS485 from Analyzer 5V 5V 5V Ground Ground Ground N C N C 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V EXT AMB TEMP J2 External Ambient Temperature Th
169. ese commands report the status of the PMT on or off The example below reports that the PMT is on Send pmt status Receive pmt status on set pmt supply onoff set pmt onoff These commands set the PMT on or off The example below turns the PMT off Send set pmt supply off Receive set pmt supply off ok save set save params These commands store all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The example below saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour time The example below reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 Thermo Fisher Scientific Communications Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour time The example below sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 set addr dns address This command sets the dns address where address con
170. essure alarm minimum value B 18 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm sample flow Reports sets sample flow alarm maximum value B 19 max alarm sample flow Reports sets sample flow alarm minimum value B 19 min alarm trig conc nh3 Reports sets current NH concentration alarm warning value B 19 alarm trig conc no Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B 19 alarm trigconcno2 Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B 19 alarm trig conc nox Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B 19 alarm trig conc nt Reports sets current N concentration alarm warning value B 19 allow mode cmd Reports sets the current allow mode setting which B 44 configures the instrument to either accept or ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands analog iout range Reports analog current output range per channel B 46 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 47 analog vout range Reports analog voltage output range per channel B 47 avg time Reports sets averaging time B 11 baud Reports sets current baud rate B 42 bkg no Reports sets current NO background B 31 bkg nox Reports sets current NO background B 31 bkg nt Reports sets current N background B 31 cal bkg no Sets auto calibrates NO background B 28 cal
171. flow The example below reports that the flow measurement is 0 400 liters minute Send flow Receive flow 0 4 1 min internal temp This command reports the current internal instrument temperature The first reading is the temperature being used in instrument calculations The second temperature is the actual temperature being measured If temperature compensation is on then both temperature readings are the same If temperature compensation is off a temperature of 30 C is used as the default temperature even though the actual internal temperature is 27 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements B 14 Model 177 Instruction Manual C The example below shows that temperature compensation is on and that the internal temperature is 27 2 C Send internal temp Receive internal temp 027 2 deg C actual 027 2 pmt temp This command reports the PMT cooler temperature The example below reports that the PMT cooler temperature is 2 8 C Send pmt temp Receive pmt temp 2 8 deg C pmt voltage This command reports the PMT voltage The example below reports that the current PMT voltage is 818 volts Send pmt voltage Receive pmt voltage 818 pres This command reports the current reaction chamber pressure The first pressure reading is the pressure reading being used in instrument calculations The second pressure is the actual pressure reading being measured If pressure compensation is on
172. full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a DATA ERec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line Thermo Fisher Scientific Value String Value Source Alarm Information Translation Table Thermo Fisher Scientific Selection Table C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word number in the DATA ERec response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x
173. gure 2 4 The exhaust line should be 1 4 inch OD with a minimum ID of 1 8 inch The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet Verify that there is no restriction in this line 4 Connect the pump exhaust port to a suitable vent The exhaust stream will contain significant concentrations of ozone and oxides of nitrogen The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet plumbed to a suitable vent A f CAUTION Ozone is present in the exhaust therefore the exhaust should be 2 4 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup Procedure Figure 2 4 Twin Head Vacuum Pump Installation 5 Connect the NO OUT NO OUT and N OUT bulkheads on the converter module rear panel to the NO IN NO IN and N IN bulkheads on the analyzer module rear panel using 1 4 inch OD Teflon tubing 6 Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector For detailed information about connecting to the instrument refer to Connecting External Devices on page 2 6 External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 3 Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 25 For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection refer to Analog Output Testing on page 7 33
174. haracter at the cursor e Press to calculate and save the new NH coefficient based on the entered span concentration The analyzer does a single point efficiency calculation corrects the NH reading for converter inefficiency and corrects the NO reading for any low temperature NH conversion If the analyzer calculates a NH span coefficient of less than 0 80 either the entered NH concentration is incorrect the converter is not being heated to the proper temperature the instrument needs servicing leak or imbalance or the converter needs replacement or servicing The NH analog output will reflect the NH concentration Note You can change the calibration factors by using the Calibration Factors menu This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation However after the above calibration procedure is completed all subsequent data reduction depends on the calibration parameters remaining the same as during the initial calibration Therefore never change any calibration factor without first recording the value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed the initial value can be re entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration A Alternative Calibration Although it is recommended that a GPT system be used to calibrate the Procedure Using NO2 NH3 analyzer the procedure described in the United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 50 Appendix F using a NO permeation tube may be used as an a
175. he scrubber 3 Pull the scrubber off the mounting clips 4 Push the replacement scrubber into the mounting clips 5 Attach the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber 6 Replace the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement Mounting Clips Figure 7 21 Replacing the Ammonia Scrubbers 1 0 Expansion Board Use the following procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board Optional Figure 7 22 Replacement Pment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 23 4 Pop off the board from the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt
176. heck see the Calibration chapter The capillary normally only requires inspection when instrument performance indicates that there may be a flow problem This may also be performed on a three month basis as part of a PM schedule Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Capillary Inspection and Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the capillary inside the analyzer 1 Turn the analyzer converter and pump OFF and unplug the power cords 2 Remove the instrument cover 3 Locate the reaction chamber capillary holder See Figure 5 1 and Figure 7 2 Dt CY Dy 4 Cajon Fitting a n lt Capillary Me dp _ Capillary O Ring p Reaction Chamber Front Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries 4 Remove the Cajon fitting s from the reaction chamber body using a 5 8 inch wrench being careful not to lose the ferrule or O ring Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement 5 4 Model 17 Instructi
177. her Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 49 Servicing Flow Transducer Calibration Flow Transducer Retaining Nuts Figure 7 25 Replacing the Flow Transducer 3 Disconnect the flow transducer cable from the measurement interface board 4 Loosen the two retaining nuts securing the flow transducer to the ozonator bracket and remove the flow transducer 5 To install the flow transducer follow previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the flow transducer Refer to the Flow Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Flow Transducer Use the following procedure to calibrate the flow transducer Calibration Equipment Required Calibrated flow sensor WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A 7 50 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Flow Transducer Calibration Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A l Remove the instrument cover Disconnect the pump cable from AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board From the Main Menu press _ to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll
178. holes are aligned Replace the top plate and secure with the eight screws and washers being sure that the Teflon gasket stays in place Reconnect the plumbing to the instrument and plug in the pump power cord Check that the reaction chamber pressure reads between 100 mmHg Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific FITTIN KN ZX FITTING EXHAUST DUT al gt SCREWS FOR MOUNTIN DIAPHRAGM HEAD 4 TOTAL SCREWS FOR MOUNTINC TOP PLATE TO DIAPHRA 8 TUTAL 77 FLAPPER VALVE DIAPHRAGM HEAI FLAPPER VALVE LAMPING DISI DIAPHRA y DISk BODY mat _ i i gt S Figure 5 4 Rebuilding the Pump Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding Model 17 Instruction Manual 5 9 Safety Precautions Troubleshooting Thermo Fisher Scientific Guides Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems For additional fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual The service mode in the Operation chapter includes parame
179. ibrates low range NO coefficient B 28 cal low nox coef Sets auto calibrates low range NO coefficient B 28 cal low nt coef Sets auto calibrates low range N coefficient B 28 cal no bkg Sets auto calibrates NO background B 28 cal no coef Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 cal no2 coef Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 cal nox bkg Sets auto calibrates NO background B 28 cal nox coef Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 28 capillary temp Reports current capillary chamber temperature B 13 clr Irecs Clears away only long records that have been saved B 20 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 20 clr srecs Clears away only short records that have been saved B 20 coef 1 no2 Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 coef 2 no2 Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 coef nh3 Reports sets current NHs coefficient B 29 coef no Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 coef no2 Reports sets current NO coefficient B 29 coef nt Reports sets current N coefficient B 29 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 37 conv set temp Reports sets temperature setpoint for NO converter B 38 conv temp Reports current NO converter temperature B 13 cooler temp Reports temperature of PMT cooler same as PMT B 13 temperature copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 26 copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 26 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selectio
180. ibration gas 6 Follow the Calibrate NO procedure described previously in Calibration selecting Cal Hi NO2 Coefficient to calibrate the high NO channel to the high NO calibration gas 7 Follow the Calibrate NH3 procedure described previously in Calibration selecting Cal Hi NH3 Coefficient to calibrate the high NH channel to the high NH calibration gas Note The low channels should be calibrated first and then the high channels due to conditioning of the measurement system with NH3 A The analyzer requires initial and periodic calibration according to the procedures outlined in this manual Initially the frequency of the calibration procedure should be determined by the stability of the zero and span checks which may be run daily You should generate a new calibration curve when zero and span checks indicate a shift in instrument gain of more than 10 percent from that determined during the most recent multipoint calibration You can adjust the frequency of calibration and even zero and span checks appropriately as you gain confidence with the instrument You should have a quality control plan where the frequency and the number of points required for calibration can be modified on the basis of calibration and zero and span check data collected over a period of time Use the following procedure to perform a zero and span check 1 Connect the zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead in a standard instrument or to th
181. icing NH3 Converter Replacement 7 26 Model 17 Instruction Manual Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 5 8 inch Screwdriver Nut driver 1 4 inch Nut driver 5 16 inch CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components amp Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn converter OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with heated components Loosen and remove the hose clamp holding thermocouple probe and converter exit plumbing together 3 Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet 4 Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature control board 5 Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate 6 Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom half 7 Remove the converter cartridge heater assembly from the bottom housing assembly 8 Remove the converter cartridge by sliding trhough ceramic heater Be sure to note the proper orientation of heater wires and thermocouple probe Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Solenoid Valve Replacement J Top Housing Assembly NH Converter Heater Core bon A Thermocouple Leads
182. ight In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read holding input registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 17 Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Request Function code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function code Byte count Register value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function code Exception code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 B
183. ile handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 3 Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and lift out the power supply Power Supply gt Retaining Screws 4 Captive Screw Figure 7 17 Replacing the DC Power Supply 4 To install the DC power supply follow the previous steps in reverse The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs you connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Analog Output Testing Analog Voltage Outputs _ 7 34 Model 17i Instruction Manual 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 4e Current Outputs Analog Voltage Inputs Of Ji Figure 7 18 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 2 From the Main Men
184. iling Send set alarm trig conc no 1 Receive set alarm trig conc no 1 ok Model 17 Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Diagnostics Datalogging B 20 Model 17 Instruction Manual Table B 3 Alarm Trigger Values Value Alarm Trigger 00 Floor 01 Ceiling diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 23 90 14 89 4 94 3 27 3 16 diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and positive 15 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 23 96 14 98 15 05 4 96 3 27 14 97 diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 23 96 4 96 3 27 3 16 clr records This command will clear all long and short records that have been saved Send clr records Receive clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs These commands will clear only the long records or only the
185. in Signal Description Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output 10 SPI Board Select 11 SPI Clock DIGITAL J2 1 Relay 1 Contact a OUTPUTS oOo a N oon A WW N Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a oOo a N on A WW N Relay 9 Contact a 10 Relay 10 Contact a 11 NC 12 Solenoid Drive Output 1 13 Solenoid Drive Output 2 6 22 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin x a gt co co N o Sz 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Solenoid Drive Output 3 Solenoid Drive Output 4 Solenoid Drive Output 5 Solenoid Drive Output 6 Solenoid Drive Output 7 Solenoid Drive Output 8 Relay 1 Contact b Relay 2 Contact b Relay 3 Contact b Relay 4 Contact b Relay 5 Contact b Relay 6 Contact b Relay 7 Contact b Relay 8 Contact b Relay 9 Contact b Relay 10 Contact b 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V Table 6 8 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator PMT IN J1 1 PMT Input 2 Ground INTF BD J2 1 15V 2 Ground 3 15V Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 6 23 Troubleshooting Connector Pin D
186. inated with either lt CR gt with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 177 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command DA the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD02 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt address 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a lt CR gt the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCC gt the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 02 after the MD indicates that two measurements are present in the reply string a 03 for three measurements and so on this will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented
187. ination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive set format 01 ok Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 lt CR gt 01 lt NL gt sum xxxx lt CR gt where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters Send set host name analyzero1 Receive set host name analyzero1 ok instr name This command reports the instrument name Model 17 Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 44 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send instr name Receive instr name NO NOx Nt Analyzer NO NOx Nt Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument id Send instrument id Receive instrument id 17 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument id to value where value is a decimal number between 0 and 127 inclusive Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new id for subsequent commands A Send set instrument id 20 Receive set instrument id 20 ok mode This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in local service or remote The example below shows that the instrument is in the remote mode Send mode Receive mode remote se
188. ing the instrument in dual or auto range be sure to use a low span gas to calibrate the low range and a high span gas to calibrate the high range Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibrate NO NO and N The Calibrate NO NO and N Background screens are used to adjust the Backgrounds background or perform a zero calibration Be sure the analyzer samples zero air until the readings stabilize The display shows the current NO NO or N reading It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating The longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be To be most accurate use the 300 second averaging time For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate NO NOx or Nt Background ERED i E si GEE TE vd PS a E L a Pi fed vows EE fees PEE aE E Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Calibration Menu Calibrate NO NO2 NO NH and N Coefficients Zero Span Check 3 22 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Calibrate NO Coefficient screen is used to adjust the NO span concentration while sampling span gas of known concentration All calibration screens operate the same way Therefore the following description of the NO calibration screen applies to the NO2 NO NH3 and N calibratio
189. instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 1 e Setup Procedure on page 2 2 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 6 e Startup on page 2 11 When lifting the instrument use procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A The Model 17i is shipped complete in multiple containers If there is obvious damage to any of the shipping containers when you receive the instrument notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the two modules from the shipping containers and set them on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear of the analyzer and converter modules Model 17 7 Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Setup Procedure 2 Remove the covers t
190. ion 7 If required connect the analog digital outputs serial port or Ethernet port to a strip chart recorder s or PC s The following procedure calibrates the analyzer using the gas phase titrator and zero gas generator described previously in this manual It is suggested that a calibration curve have at least seven points between the zero and full scale NO concentrations Although the seven point curve is optional two of whatever number of points is chosen should be located at the zero and 80 levels and the remaining points equally spaced between these values Note When the instrument is equipped with internal zero span and sample valves the ZERO and SPAN ports should give identical responses to the SAMPLE port when test gases are introduced The user should calibrate the instrument using the SAMPLE port to introduce the zero and span gas sources After calibration the zero and span sources should be plumbed to the appropriate ports on the rear panel of the instrument and then reintroduced to the instrument The instrument should give identical responses to the test gases whether they are introduced via the SAMPLE port or the ZERO or SPAN ports If not the plumbing and or valves should be serviced A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration SetNO NO andN 1 Set the NO NO and N backgrounds to zero Backgrounds to Zero The NO NO and N background corrections are determined during ze
191. ion gt Analog Output Config gt Select Channel gt Select Range Minimum and Maximum The Minimum Value screen is used to edit the zero 0 to full scale 100 Value value in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 7 for a list of choices In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range Status is visible only in auto range mode The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The example below shows the set minimum value screen 3 46 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration gt Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Config gt Select Channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value ae i EN EUH Eek Bone O EH pika Table 3 7 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table Output Zero Value Full Scale 100 Value NO Zero 0 Range Setting NO Zero 0 Range Setting NO Zero 0 Range Setting NH3 Zero 0 Range Setting Ni Zero 0 Range Setting LO NO Zero 0 Range Setting LO NO Zero 0 Range Setting LO NO Zero 0 Range Setting LO NH3 Zero 0 Range Setting LO N Zero 0 Range Setting HI NO Zero 0 Range Setting HI NO Zero 0 Range Setting HI NO Zero 0 Range Setting HI NH3 Zero 0 Range Setting
192. ith a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND The optional I O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices such as meteorological equipment The user may assign a label unit and a voltage to user defined unit conversion table up to 16 points All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e NO Measure Mode e NO Measure Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components e N Measure Mode e Zero Ga
193. ithin these records see the flags command Send erec Receive erec 22 24 03 24 00 flags 50010000 no 5 150E 03 nox 7 170E 03 nt 7 710E 03 lono 5 150E 03 1 lonox 7 710E 03 lont 7 710E 03 pmtv 825 101 pres 86 554 of al_temper O of al_flow 0 avgt1 10 avgt2 10 nobkg 9 856 noxbkg 9 670 ntbkg 9 775 lonocoef 1 000 lonoxcoef 1 000 loNTcoef 1 000 lono2coef1 1 000 lono2coef2 1 000 lonh3coef 1 000 norange 20000 000 lonoxrange 20000 000 lontrange 20000 000 lono2range 20000 000 lonh3range 20000 000 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging lrec srec lrec xxxx yy SLCC XXXX YY lrec aa bb 00 pp qq yy srec aa bb 00 pp qq yy xxxx the number of past records yy the number of records to return 1 to 10 aa hours 01 to 24 bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year These commands output long or short records and dynamic data The output format is determined by the set lrec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set lrec per and set srec per commands In the following example there are 740 long records currently stored in memory When the command Irec 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records s
194. its 00 0 eeeseeeeees 3 63 Capillary Temperature 2c2csujcerzeceicisayessisyserdds adit anereadieeienteess 3 64 Min and Max Capillary Temperature Limits cee 3 64 Cooler Temperature siidiussi iriri in eriti an a nirai 3 64 Min and Max Cooler Temperature Limits ssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseresese 3 65 Converter Leniperatures sea asea AA E LIR 3 65 Min and Max Converter Temperature Limits s sseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 3 65 External Converter Temperature ssc cyceateres ass teeta vend cans eeccondoescees 3 66 Min and Max External Converter Temperature Limits 3 66 PrESSUTE susce nienie deiina aiea ieie e e eeaeee eiie 3 67 Min and Max Pressure Limits sssssssssessesessssesesesseeeeresrseseseseses 3 67 Flowin le geese a a a Stanek a s 3 67 Min and Max Flow Limits ssssssesssssssssssesssrsrsrsrsrererrrrerersrsreres 3 68 Ozonator Flow 2 ciaci senile aniei i Eaa 3 68 Zero and Span Checkireisesntdi tonne e aE 3 68 Max Zero and Span Offset sssssesesesesesssesessesesrsesrrrererrerereesrersres 3 69 Zero and Span Auto Calibration oa cect acer nea Ae Crees 3 69 NO NO NO NH3 and N Concentration ce eeseseeeneeseeeees 3 69 Min and Max NO NO NO NHs and N Concentration TOUS EE E E en ainisaast er odacd Suda Coe va telat aast tare agontas 3 70 Min Triger nuca a a a 3 70 Servic Men den sa at e e a e E E S TAi 3 71 PMT Voltage Adjustment sssssesssesesessseseessesrsesrsesrsesesrsessseseseseses 3 71 Range Mode Selecteren eane
195. k Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed B 56 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other analog values or variables read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS commands listed below For details of the Model 17i MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Seria
196. l Commands 1 0 Configuration 3 nox 18 intt 19 rctt 20 pmtt 21 convt 22 cvext 25 pres 26 smplf 27 pmtv 35 ozonf 55 tcapil relay stat This command reports the current relay logic normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The example below shows that the status when all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The example below sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open B 50 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok Recor
197. l Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 8 Number of Stop bits 1 Parity None Data rate from 1200 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 17 Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual iSeries Instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS save address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex This address is only use
198. lace the valves Follow the instructions for valve replacement if changing of the valves is required 3 Use the spanner wrench to loosen and remove the one piece clamping disc screw E Remove the old diaphragms from both heads G 4 Remove the four pan head screws with M5 washers J and remove the housing cover K from the front of the pump body If necessary carefully use a small flat bladed screwdriver to pry off the housing cover 5 Install the two PTFE white color diaphragms together with one TFM translucent diaphragm as shown in Figure E 1 Install with the ridges of the diaphragm convolutions as shown in the diaphragm stack cross section inset 6 Temporarily insert two of the head screws through the diaphragms and screw into the pump body to keep the position of the diaphragms as the clamping disc is tightened Any stress applied re aligning the diaphragm in the process of assembling the head will significantly reduce diaphragm life 7 Check the threads of the clamping disc to insure that they are clean and free of debris Apply a small amount of the breakable thread adhesive to the clamping disc threads and install Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement Valve Replacement 7 14 Model 17 Instruction Manual 8 Rotate the counterweight until the connecting rod is in mid stroke and then tighten the clamping disc Do not over tighten
199. ler by following previous steps in reverse Note Fasten knurled fittings on reaction chamber finger tight A Make sure that the heat shrink covered tubing between the reaction chamber and the converter is light tight at the connections amp Thermo Fisher Scientific Photomultiplier Tube Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Photomultiplier Tube Replacement 9 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the PMT tube Equipment Required Photomultiplier tube and PMT base Nut driver 5 16 inch Flat blade screwdriver Philips screwdriver small Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the high voltage cable from the PMT power supply and unplug the BNC cable from the Input Board 3 Remove six external screws holding PMT cover plate and the four screws holding the PMT shroud to the panel and remove the PMT cover plate Figure 7 9 If the cooler fan is attached unplug the fan power cord if necessary Ir Pee Ll4 PMT Cover Plate Screws 6 O i o 1_ PMT Shroud Screws 4 olle ejjo PMT Base Screws 3 PMT Ba
200. ling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all connectors from the temperature control board Use a small flat blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the CONV TC cable Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the yellow wire is towards the front 3 Snap off the board from the board mounts 4 To install the temperature control board follow previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the ambient temperature thermistor Figure 7 20 Equipment Required Thermistor Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing Ambient Temperature Calibration Ambient Temperature Calibration 7 42 Model 17 Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the thermistor latch and pull the thermistor from the AMB TEMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 Snap the new thermistor into the AMB TEMP connector Figure 7 20 Replacing the Thermistor Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature for the instrument Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10K
201. ll to Pressure Calibration gt and press The Pressure Sensor Cal menu appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu press to select Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears 5 Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize then press to save the zero pressure value 6 Disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer 7 Press to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Temperature Control Board Replacement A Thermistor Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Temperature Control Board Replacement 8 At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu press 4 to select Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears 9 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e Jand to enter the known barometric pressure and press _ to save the pressure value 10 Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer 11 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the temperature control board inside the analyzer Figure 7 8 Equipment Required Temperature control board Small flat blade screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while hand
202. lternative procedure for calibrating the NO channel Alternately a NH permeation tube may also be used to calibrate the NH3 channel Permeation Tube 4 16 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode Calibration in Dual The dual auto range calibration feature is used to calibrate the analyzer at R ange an d Auto two different span levels as opposed to a single span level in the standard mode generating a tailored multi point calibration curve stored in the Range Mode analyzer s memory This feature may be used e When widely different gas levels are being monitored such as a factor of 10 or greater apart e If precision and span levels are being introduced using separate tanks e If more than one multi component cylinder is being used to calibrate the instrument Properly designed chemiluminescence analyzers are inherently linear over a wide dynamic range and under normal USEPA compliance situations this feature is not required Dual calibration may be used for span levels less than a factor of 10 apart however if this is done to correct for a significant non linearity it may mask the problems causing the effect such as bad calibration cylinder leaks in sampling lines or low ozonator output Use the following procedure to calibrate the analyzer in dual or auto range mode SetNO NO andN 1 Follow the Set the NO NO and N backgrounds to zero
203. lue set nox bkg value These commands are used to set NO NO and N backgrounds to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the background in current selected units The example below sets the NO background to 5 5 ppb Send set bkg no 5 5 Receive set bkg no 5 5 ok push button do down en BR ON enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Model 17 Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display B 32 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen This command retrieves the framebuffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data void unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen int i j k unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr ptr screen unsigned char far mallo
204. mall must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect the reaction chamber connector from the temperature control board 3 Snap off the temperature control board from the board mounts 4 Remove the four screws securing the cooler shroud to the rear panel and remove the shroud Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement Model 17 Instruction Manual Temperature Control Board Cooler Shroud Reaction Chamber BNC Connectorto Input Board y To PMT HVPS To BENCH on Temp Control Board 5 Slo To COOLER on Measurement Captive Screws 4 SS Onn Interface Board Two Not Shown Figure 7 8 PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber 5 Disconnect plumbing connections from the reaction chamber 6 Disconnect the cables from the PMT high voltage power supply the input board and the measurement interface board Remove all tie wraps securing the cables Loosen four captive screws holding cooler to floor plate and remove the cooler assembly with the reaction chamber Note If only the cooler is being replaced remove the PMT and reaction chamber from the old cooler and install them on the new cooler A Install new coo
205. ment lt CR gt is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt Each Command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or lt CR gt If a command is terminated with lt ETX gt then additional two characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt this is the block checksum Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum lt BCC gt Geysitech Commands Instrument Control Command Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum lt BCC gt The block checksum is calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with lt CR gt no checksum is attached The block checksum is represented by two characters which represent
206. ment s identification number plus 128 For example if the instrument ID is set to 25 then each command must begin with the ACSI character code 153 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If Model 177 Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Commands Commands List B 2 Model 177 Instruction Manual the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters via remote However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercase characters Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the example below begins with the ASCII character code 170 decimal which directs the command to the Model 173 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal If an incorrect command is sent a bad command message will be received The example below sends the incorrect command set unit ppm instead of the correct command set gas
207. ment out of calibration Recalibrate instrument Alarm Span Check Alarm Zero Autocal Instrument out of calibration Check gas supply Perform Alarm Span Autocal manual calibration Alarm NO NO NO Concentration has exceeded Check to insure range NHs N Conc range limit corresponds with expected value If not select proper range Concentration low Check user defined low set point be sure the min trigger is set as desired Alarm Motherboard Internal cables not connected Check that all internal cables are Status properly connected properly Check that Alarm Interface Board is defective 15 pin cable between analyzer Status and converter is connected Alarm 1 0 Exp Status correctly Recycle AC power to analyzer If still alarming change Alarm Ext Converter board Status 6 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 through Figure 6 3 are board level connection diagrams for the c common electronics measurement system and external converter These onnection amine illustrations can be used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table Diagra ms 6 3 through Table 6 11 to troubleshoot board level faults EXPANSION I O 25 Pin TOMEASURAVENT SYSTEM DIGITAL outputs 37 Pin RS232 RS485 DISPLAY RS232 RS485 10 BASE T KEY PANEL EXPANSION RS485 SPARE DATA ANALOG OUTPUTS DIGITAL
208. methanol 4 To continue removing rear of reaction chamber remove the three socket head screws holding it to cooler being careful to keep quartz window and red filter in cooler body 5 To reinstall reaction chamber follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to installing reaction chamber 6 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter PMT Cooler Red Filter OAL Me a gt es Quartz Window ra qf Ife at gt AL KNO g O Ring 2 127 E y ue l 9 faa Reaction Chamber Front pou Figure 7 11 Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 7 Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing NO2 to NO Converter Replacement NO to NO Converter Replacement 7 24 Model 177 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the NO2 to NO converter Figure 7 12 Equipment Required NO 2 to NO Converter Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 5 8 inch Screwdriver Nut driver 1 4 inch Nut driver 5 16 inch CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antis
209. mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote irrespective of the above setting A Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd 1 ok Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Accept default 1 Ignore power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting according to according to Table B 11 The example that follows shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote locked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 set power up mode value This command sets the instrument to power up mode value where value is set to either local unlocked mode or remote locked mode according to Table B 11 If the instrument is set to power up in the local unlocked mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to power up in the remote unlocked mode changes can not be made from the front panel The example below sets the instrument to power up in remote locked mode Model 17 Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Configuration B 46 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values Value Power up Mode 0 Local Unlocked Mode default 1 Remote Locked Mode program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number which will be dep
210. mp The Minimum External Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum external converter temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum external converter temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Ext Converter Temp gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Pressure The Pressure screen displays the current reaction chamber pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 200 mmHg If the pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Min and Max Pressure The Minimum Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum Limits temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Min or Max Flow The Flow screen displays the current sample flow reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 1 LPM If the sample flow reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarm
211. n Instrument Controls Menu tOo Miker i Volts The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Select Point gt Volts wee DPF Ce a E SO a EA User Value The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Table Point gt User Value 3 52 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Temperature Temperature compensation provides compensation for any changes to the Compensation instrument s output signal due to internal instrument temperature variations The effects of internal instrument temperature changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature This compensation can be used for special applications or when operating the instrument o
212. n Codes below In MODBUS over Serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 17i Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 17 Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 17 Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relay
213. n Diagram Connector Label MOTHER BOARD Reference Designator J1 Pin o o N oon A U N gt gt gt a N a a N gt co co N o Sz P w N N N N N N FP wo N gt gt Q Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltage 5V Ground Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Model 17i Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions a 5 Connector Reference Label Designator Signal Description N ol Keypad Col 2 Select N o Keypad Col 1 Select N N Keypad Col 4 Select N co Keypad Col 3 Select N co Ground w oO Ground wo Ground oo N Ground 24V 24V LDO_5V LCD Signal LD1_5V LCD Signal LD2_5V LCD Signal LD3_5V LCD Signal LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal LFLM_5V LCD Signal NC LLP_5V LCD Signal LCLK_5V LCD Signal 10 5V wo wo BR LCD DATA J2 oOo a N oon A WW N a Ground 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground KEYBOARD J3 1 Keypad Row 1 Input a a a w N Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Select Keypa
214. n Terminal Board Assembly ic i3sccsssscctiiacincessanetsdeda dewisenrncovesians 9 2 Terminal Block and Cable Kites s ss se0ss cataveccieansicecidassesssidarsavebaiscentee 9 3 RAD EEE E EE A E E E E E ce 9 3 MGunting Optiohsisiscii aii i iiis 9 5 Warranty oee a a A 1 C Link Protocol CommandS nnnnnn1rrrerererrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssrrrrrrrerne B 1 Instrument Identification Number s ssssssssssssssseseseesrsesessesesesesseseseee B 1 Commanders sages hea betes ann chi a esas eeil aa EEEE ee aeih B 2 Commands Tist yae a a E ER B 2 Measurements iiir onecie ieu rr osaa avreta eiaei eis B 11 AaS tsa a E Ais dda e aaa as aes AaS B 15 DBO SCS aia E N estates tevantesteaags B 20 Datalog ngos 8 ce bots cee ck A ca EE oP cual aa AE is B 20 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents AI TEL TOs ceSuacbtancaucsh cats a causanen WA led coat ceteris a B 28 Keys Display ciccictiessnivecdtiinay iiew i dilecsisuelentiade Mhineeaulecarneeddie B 31 Measurement Configuration cect cst nesndent td Salve Sedlieddentaten B 33 Hardware Configuration cc ccisitevazascaeaecesdeeetensdisagesanteuscuesdevernsteeeereed B 37 Communications Configuration tec5 ana hid te ee a B 41 TAO Combi Stig th Gin cscs acai aa aa E R B 46 Record Layout Wet ILIO Nascent Ci slina iaiedtakd te Sanaa eas oaiadastcets B 51 Format Specifier for ASCII Responses sesssssseseereeseeeeeeseeeees B 51 Format Specifier for Binary Responses
215. n action zero or span Current channels are visible only if the I O expansion board is installed The analog output calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Service Menu EH pikari Ce a E S a EA Be Cen BME E EPak Bone PUO hal Piro pH pipiri Hiet pihe PEPLE i Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Zero OPER EEE i Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust output until it reads the value shown in the set output to field e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale 3 80 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu
216. n screens as well The display shows the current NO concentration reading The next line of the display is where the span calibration gas concentration is entered It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating The longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be To be most accurate use the 300 second averaging time In dual or auto range modes HIGH or LOW is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low range coefficient For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO NO2 NOx NH3 or Nt Coefficient The Zero Span Check menu is available with the zero span valve option It is used to program the instrument to perform fully automated zero and span checks or adjustments Total Duration Hr is the sum of zero span and purge duration minutes Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected and displayed if auto calibration is installed Note Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected and displayed if auto calibration is installed and the instrument is in single range manual mode A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu a pruni Ph dm propru pH mnie PPP L Ea bai Pt Next Time The Next Time scre
217. nal that is tied to the selected streaming data item The selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Select Item gt Other Measurements The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that is tied to the selected streaming data item The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Select Item gt Analog Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu prak pruni PELIR E prm PPP L mild Bab i WH mri RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication f Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to the connected equipment A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt RS 232 RS 485 Selection ERE e DH prispr tO a i a EA TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining TCP IP settings Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Co
218. nator ON c Press gt to return to the Run screen 3 Be sure the instrument is in the auto mode that is NO NO2 NO NH and N measurements are being displayed on the front panel display If the instrument is not in auto mode a Press to display the Main Menu then choose Instrument Controls gt Auto Manual Mode b Select NO NOx Nt and press c Press gt to return to the Run screen 4 Select the NO NO2 NO NH3 and N ranges For more information about the ranges and custom ranges see the Operation chapter a Press Jto display the Main Menu then choose Range gt NO Range NO2 Range NOx Range NH3 Range Nt Range or Set Custom Ranges Model 17 Instruction Manual 4 9 Calibration Calibration Calibration 4 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual b Select concentration range and press c Press gt to return to the Run screen 5 Select the AVG soft key to display the Averaging Time screen It is recommended that a higher averaging time be used for best results For more information about the averaging time see the Operation chapter a Press to display the Main Menu then choose Averaging Time b Select 300 and press e c Press gt to return to the Run screen Note The averaging time should be less than the zero duration and less than the span duration A 6 Verify that any filters used during normal monitoring are also used during calibrat
219. nction Does not start up the display backlight is off and nothing is on the display Possible Cause No power or wrong power configuration Main fuse is blown or missing Bad switch or wiring connection DC power supply failure DC power distribution failure Display failure Action Check the line to confirm that power is available and that it matches the voltage and frequency configuration of the instrument Unplug the power cord to the analyzer open the fuse drawer on the back panel and check fuses visually or with a multimeter Unplug the power cord to the analyzer disconnect the switch on the front panel and check operation with a multimeter Check the green LED on the back edge of the power supply If the LED is off the supply has failed Check 24V output using a multimeter Check surface mount LEDs labelled 24V PWR on the motherboard interface board and converter interface board If lit power is OK If possible check instrument function through RS 232 or Ethernet Contact Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department Reduced response or no response to sample gas System failure No sample gas reaching the analyzer Span cylinder empty Calibration system failure Ruptured pump diaphragm Blocked sample capillary No high voltage reaching the PMT Check alarm screens and diagnostic voltage screens to localize fault Check flow and pressure readings on the Diagnos
220. ne hed piso lac tans a a a aa anupectanshes 4 5 Zero AIT aiiin KAN EE E A iN 4 6 Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator sseseeeeeee 4 6 Determining GPT System Flow Conditions sssr 4 6 Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer sses 4 8 PreGalibtati h ennaa aea a a E R 4 9 Calibration nnii i a a na 4 10 Alternative Calibration Procedure Using NO NH Permeation Tuberia a a adenine dein ORAE E ERRES 4 16 Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode teeters 4 17 Zero aid Span Ch 23 ae ote An AAAA 4 18 Preventive Maintenance ss cssiscsscsisictacctsscuscctsssnssctbsctancessesssnchancovinuscddvatbancontiics 5 1 Safety Precautions ornen a R E KEN 5 1 Replacement Partiano Nope eee a a 5 2 Cleaning the Outside Case ssssesesseesesesesesesestsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrstsrseseseseseseses 5 2 Model 177 Instruction Manual ix Contents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 x Model 17 Instruction Manual Visual Inspection and Clea titi Gate 25 5 s usntem tesccteah ni oial eetaegeianctiete 5 2 Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement eeseeeeeereeees 5 2 Capillary Inspection and Replacement sssecsesseeeeeeeceeeseeeeneeaees 5 2 Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement ceseeeeeeeeees 5 4 Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning ieee 5 6 Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning 2oc 6 45sec Gaede 5 6 Pamp Reb ilding srera ena a e ii s 5 7 Troubleshooting irii ea a a a 6 1 Safety Preca tions v nurnerr n oiin 6
221. nel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Front Panel Connector Board 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Outputs System Description 1 0 Components The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage inputs and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of OV to 1OVDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the front panel mounted function key panel and Graphics display It serves as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog inpu
222. nnel to the source voltage Press gt to return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Use the following procedure to replace the pressure transducer assembly Figure 7 19 Equipment Required Pressure transducer assembly Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect plumbing from the pressure transducer assembly Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Transducer Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration 3 Disconnect the pressure transducer cable Retaining Screws 2 Pressure Transducer Assembly Figure 7 19 Replacing the Pressure Transducer 4 Remove the two pressure transducer assembly retaining screws and remove the pressure transducer assembly 5 To install the pressure transducer assembly follow previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the pressure transducer Refer to the Pressure Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer Equipment Required Vacuum pump WARNING The service pr
223. ns Service For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors Locations worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 27 Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 177 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode in the Operation chapter also includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 4 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 e Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 10 e Pump Replacement on page 7 11 e Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve
224. ns in scratch pad into srec list B 26 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 26 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 26 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 177 Instruction Manual Command Description Page copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 26 pad custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration B 34 data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in long B 21 records data treatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in B 21 short records date Reports sets current date B 38 default params Sets parameters to default values B 39 dhcp Reports sets state of use of DHCP B 42 diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage level for I O expansion board B 20 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard B 20 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface B 20 board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 48 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 48 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 31 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 48 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 48 channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B
225. nsion board installed LO NO dual PMT Volts Analog Input 8 if 1 0 Expansion board installed LO NH dual Ozonator Flow LO N dual Capillary Temp HI NO dual HI NO dual HI NO dual HI NH dual HI N dual Range auto range The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input channels available for configuration This screen is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering descriptor units decimal places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Descriptor Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length
226. ntil is pressed In dual or auto range modes HIGH or LOW is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low coefficient The example below shows the coefficient screen in single range mode Model 17 7 Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Calibration Menu 3 20 Note The concentration value will show ERROR if the measured concentration is not a valid span value either higher than the selected range or 0 or lower A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt NO NO2 NOx NH3 or Nt Coef tO Mihei i Reset User Calibration The Reset User Calibration Default screen allows the user to reset the Default calibration configuration values to factory defaults e In the Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Reset User Cal Defaults ERED CH Pm Tit Wi mpini EUS EE TE Aad fuese may Fae Le hi aad ben Phi PE EOE Ph my pa p pri L a E L Py in aes Calibration Menu The Calibration menu is used to calibrate the background of NO NO and N and the NO NO NO NH and N channels The screens below show the calibration menu in single mode and dual auto range modes The zero span check item is visible only if the zero span option is installed The calibration procedure is the same in dual auto or single range however there are two sets of gas coefficients in dual or auto range i e low and high coefficients This enables each range to be calibrated separately When calibrat
227. ntrols gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings ROR in Pate CH bo bet EN EEE TE Sanat Bone EY Fane Bast ade 5 i iNi i Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Use DHCP IP Address Netmask 3 40 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DCHP The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is OFF For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Address DH Guided font PEL PTEP SE The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet for which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices on The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is OFF For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu BEE Rri Taic Default Gateway The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gatew
228. nverter Set Temperature screen is used to change the Temperature external converter set temperature The external converter set temperature reading is updated every second The external converter set temperature screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Ext Converter Set Temperature Pressure Calibration The Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The pressure calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter The pressure sensor s zero counts and span slope are displayed on the menu Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Service Menu 3 74 Mode Calibrate Pressure Zero Calibrate Pressure Span 177 Instruction Manual The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen calibrates the pressure sensor at zero pressure Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before performing the zero calibration Wait at least 30 seconds for th
229. nverter inefficiency then adds the corrected NO to the NO signal to give corrected NO and N signals If the analyzer calculates a NO span coefficient of less than 0 96 either the entered NO concentration is incorrect the converter is not being heated to the proper temperature the instrument needs servicing leak or imbalance or the converter needs replacement or servicing The NO analog output will reflect the NO concentration generated by GPT any NO impurity and the NO zero offset Use the following procedures to calibrate the NH channel to the NH3 calibration gas a Disconnect the source of NO from the converter module In its place connect a source of NH3 A known calibration source NH is required to measure the NH conversion efficiencies of the two converters in the Model 172 as well as calibrate the NH channel of the analyzer b Allow the analyzer to sample the NH calibration gas until the NO NO NO NH and N readings stabilize c When the responses stabilize from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NH3 Coefficient Model 177 Instruction Manual 4 15 Calibration Calibration The NH field displays the current NH concentration The NH Span Conc field is where you enter the NH calibration gas concentration d Set the NH calibration gas concentration to the NH3 concentration Use _ to move the cursor left and right and use t to increment and decrement the numeric c
230. o 50 excess The Os generator ozonator airflow rate and the NO flow rate must be adjusted such that the following relationships hold Pr NO pc X tr 2 2 75 ppm min 2 Fno NO Ire INO Isto Fot Fro sVe Zi tr 7 Fo Fno Determining GPT System Use the following procedure to determine the flow conditions to be used in Flow Conditions the GPT system 4 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required Determine Fr the total flow required at the output manifold which should be equal to the analyzer demand plus 10 to 50 percent excess Establish NO our as the highest NO concentration that will be required at the output manifold NO our should be about equal to 90 of the upper range limit URL of the NO concentration range to be covered Determine Fno as F NO OUT X Fr NO NO Istp Select a convenient or available reaction chamber volume Initially a trial volume may be selected in the range of 200 to 500 cc Compute Fo as Fo INO Isp Eno X Vac _ 2 75 De Compute tr as VRC QS Fo Fno Verify that tr lt 2 minutes If not select a reaction chamber with a smaller Vac Compute the diluent air flow rate as Fp Fr Fo Fno If Fo turns out to be impractical for the desired system select a reaction chamber having a different Vrce and recompute Fp and Fo Model 177 Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibra
231. o any desired value All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating range Internal pumps and heaters all operate on 110VAC An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210 250VAC or 90 110VAC ranges An on off switch controls all power to the analyzer and is accessible on the front panel The on off switch on the converter only controls the AC power to the heaters the converter electronics are powered through the umbilical cable connected to the analyzer The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel mounted function key panel and or over I O connections on the rear panel and sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the front panel mounted graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include External connectors include e External Accessory to external converter e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors
232. o expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material in the analyzer Figure 2 1 if ue A UIV Remove Packing 2 pieces Remove Packing 2 pieces Units without Optional I O Board Units with Optional 1 0 Board Setup Procedure 2 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material Check for possible damage during shipment Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached Re install the covers Remove any protective plastic material from the case exteriors Remove the external pump from its shipping container and place next to the instrument Use the following procedure to setup the instrument l Connect the sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel Figure 2 2 Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty wet or incompatible materials All tubing should be constructed of PFA Teflon 316 stainless steel borosilicate glass or similar tubing with an OD of 1 4 inch and a minimum ID of 1 8 inch The length of the tubing should be less than 10 feet Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup Procedure 3 F H 5 ka onl z ATMOSPHERIC DUMP z ob d SL P
233. o the beginning of this step A 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e gt Jand to enter the known temperature and press to save the temperature value 5 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Replacement Parts List in this chapter 1 Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing Ammonia Scrubber Replacement 7 44 Ammonia Scrubber Replacement Model 17 Instruction Manual A 2 Remove fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 3 Ifeither fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and reconnect power cord Use the following procedure to replace the ammonia scrubbers inside the converter Figure 7 21 Equipment Required Ammonia scrubber Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Note After replacing the optional I O expansion board calibrate the current outputs and the analog voltage inputs See the Analog Output Calibration procedure and the Analog Input Calibration procedure in this chapter A 1 Turn converter module OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unscrew the Teflon tubing at both ends of t
234. o to Input Board Test screen Service menu and step through each range while the instrument samples a known stable source of gas Stay on the Input Board Test screen and while holding instrument on the lowest gain step the calibrator through gas levels Unplug power cord Remove PMT Install known good PMT Plug in power cord Check performance Excessive response time Partially blocked sample capillary Instrument is not drawing in sample at normal flow rate Slow averaing time chosen Inadequate line conditioning Clean or replace Check sample Flow and Pressure readings on the Diagnostics screens Perform a leak test Check the averaging time screen Introduce NH to the instrument for at least one hour Improper converter operation Questionable calibration gas Converter temperature too high or too low N and NO converters Low line voltage Internal oxide layer of Nt converter stripped or converter not conditioned properly Defective converter heater Temperature control board failure Verify accuracy Temperature should be approximately 325 C for the analyzer module and 800 C for the converter module Check to see if line voltage is within specifications Run the analyzer overnight with zero air containing oxygen Note that the sample should contain some oxygen during normal operation so as not to strip the converter If converter isn t heating up replace conve
235. ocedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration 7 40 Model 177 Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Note An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading Therefore if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump only adjust the span setting A A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the current barometric pressure from the local weather station or airport and comparing it to the pressure reading However since these pressures are usually corrected to sea level it may be necessary to correct the reading to local pressure by subtracting 0 027 mmHg per foot of altitude A Do not try to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known accurately A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg 3 From the Main Menu press _ to scroll to Service gt press gt to scro
236. oltages Wi hiv External Converter Board The External Converter Board screen read only is used to display the Voltages current voltage readings on the external converter board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Ext Converter Board Voltages Wi hid Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the internal temperature reaction chamber temperature cooler temperature and converter temperatures The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the interface board Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Temperatures EPOE EPak Booe B Pmi F Mikeni i Pressure The Pressure screen read only displays the reaction chamber pressure The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer at the reaction chamber e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure CREED RG popogi gy gp EEEE E aaoh Fosso Poir Seod daat aha DOE Faook osae Phen PEE EE Flow The Flow screen read only displays the sample and ozonator flow rate The flows are measured by internal flow sensors e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flow OPE ba EEE E Analog Input Readings The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 current user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu ch
237. on Manual Remove the glass capillary ferrule and O ring Inspect O ring for cuts or abrasion and replace as necessary Check capillary for particulate deposits Clean or replace as necessary Replace capillary in reaction chamber body making sure the O ring is around the capillary before inserting it into the body Replace Cajon fitting Note that the Cajon fitting should be tightened slightly more than hand tight Reconnect tubing to top of fitting being careful to insert ferrule and O ring properly and tighten knurled nut finger tight 10 Re install the cover 11 Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the converter capillaries Turn the analyzer converter and pump OFF and unplug the power cords Remove the cover of the converter module Locate the heated capillary holder Figure 5 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement _ turd TLS aie O e Cajon Fitting S L Sits rel Capillary o lt Capillary 0 Ring j i ims R J PEAN Heated Capillary Holder A Z aN cS Ee Figure 5 2 Inspecting and Replacing the Converter Capillaries 4 Remove the Cajon fitting s from the holder using a 5 8 inch wrench being careful not to lose the ferrule or O ring 5 Remove the glass capillaries ferrule and O ring Inspect O ring for cuts or abrasion an
238. on number e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Program Version Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Diagnostics Menu tOo Mihei i Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board item is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages Pid EEE of Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard Voltages BREED oo RT pogen gy mre EEE EPak Bose EOT hed hat h POES e Pi EE EE Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board Voltages 3 56 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu prek pruni Ph dm prepr pH pirri Pp E a L Ea E ae L pa 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board V
239. onverter temperature alarm minimum value is 700 0 C Send alarm ext conv temp min Receive alarm ext conv temp min 700 0 deg C set alarm ext conv temp min value set alarm ext conv temp max value These commands set the external converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the external converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the external converter temperature alarm maximum value to 740 0 C Send set alarm ext conv temp max 740 Receive set alarm ext conv temp max 740 ok alarm cooler temp min alarm cooler temp max These commands report the PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value is 10 0 C Model 17 Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 18 Model 177 Instruction Manual Send alarm cooler temp min Receive alarm cooler temp min 10 0 deg C set alarm cooler temp min value set alarm cooler temp max value These commands set the PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the cooler temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the cooler temperature alarm maximum value to 2 0 C Send set alarm cooler temp max 2 0 Receive set alarm cooler temp max 2 0 ok alarm internal temp min alarm int
240. oose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings 3 58 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu ERE CH Py Tite WH mid PS PHP L Py AG HR Analog Input Voltages The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs ERED CH perm Bathu Pei Eesi er EH bo bet Bs EEE TE Sanat Beee TOP Fane Bast ade 5 i PG Relay States The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States e Press to toggle and set the relay state open or closed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Diagnostics Menu DH pikari Ce a E S a E Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs menu contains a number of digital to analog converter DAC calibration items Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Output
241. orts the variable number and name stored at index in the scratch pad list The example below shows that the field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 13 which is for the variable pressure Send sp field 5 Receive sp field 5 13 pres set sp field number value number 1 32 is the maximum number of fields in long and short record lists number 1 18 is for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the analog out variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the long record short record or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 1 34 Receive set sp field 1 34 ok stream per This command reports the currently set time interval in seconds for streaming data Send stream per Receive stream per 10 set stream per number value number value 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The example below sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok
242. ose Service gt Flow Calibration The Calibrate Flow Zero screen calibrates the flow sensor at zero flow Note The pump must be disconnected before performing the zero calibration Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Zero EH vided PLP Calibrate Flow Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow sensor calibration span point Note An independent flow sensor is required to read the flow then the operator enters the flow value on this screen to perform the calibration Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Span DH vided PLP Restore Default Flow The Restore Default Flow Calibration screen allows the user to reset the Calibration flow calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Set Defaults 3 76 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Input Board Calibration Manual Input Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the input A D stages The input board calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode Fo
243. out 80 of the full scale range Allow the analyzer to sample the NO calibration gas until the NO NO NO NHs and N readings stabilize When the responses stabilize from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO Coefficient Model 17 Instruction Manual 4 11 Calibration Calibration The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO concentration The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter the NO calibration gas concentration d Set the NO calibration gas concentration to the NO concentration Use _ to move the cursor left and right and use t to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor e Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration The exact NO concentration is calculated from _ FnoX NOstp NO J our OUT Fyo Fo Fp Where NO our Diluted NO concentration at the output manifold ppm NOsrp No feed concentration Fno No flow Fo Ozone flow Fp Dilution flow The NO recorder response will equal Recorder Response scale x 100 Zno NO Jour R Where URL Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel ppm f Record the NO our concentration and the analyzer NO response as indicated by the recorder response Calibrate NO 3 Calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas a Press to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal NOx Coefficient b Verify that
244. ow min alarm sample flow max These commands report the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the sample flow alarm minimum value is 0 350 LPM Send alarm sample flow min Receive alarm sample flow min 0 3 1 min set alarm sample flow min value set alarm sample flow max value These commands set the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the sample flow alarm limits in liters per minute The example below sets the sample flow alarm maximum value to 1 LPM Send set alarm sample flow max 1 Receive set alarm sample flow max 1 ok alarm trig conc no alarm trig conc no2 alarm trig conc nox alarm trig conc nh3 alarm trig conc nt This command reports the NO NO NO NH3 and N concentration alarm trigger action for minimum alarm current setting to either floor or ceiling The example below shows the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling according to Table B 3 Send alarm trig conc no Receive alarm trig conc no 1 set alarm trig conc no value set alarm trig conc no2 value set alarm trig conc nox value set alarm trig conc nh3 value set alarm trig conc nt value These commands set the NO NO2 NO NH3 and N concentration alarm minimum value where value is set to either floor or ceiling according to Table B 3 The example below sets the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ce
245. ower up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processor The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement values The one second accumulated counts representing the NO NO N concentrations are accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds Model 17 Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Software Measurement Calculations Output Communication 8 6 Model 177 Instruction Manual the measurement is reported every 10 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor In auto mode every ten seconds the NO NO N solenoid switches and the processor waits three seconds for the reaction chamber to flush and
246. pan averaging time The zero span averaging time is used by the analyzer only when performing an automatic zero or span check or calibration The analyzer s averaging time is used for all other functions The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds in NO NO N mode only 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds are available e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Avg Sec Haat abe POES owe Pi EE EE Zero Span Ratio The Zero Span Ratio screen is used to adjust the ratio of zeros to spans For example if this value is set to 1 a span check will follow every zero check 3 24 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu If this value is set to 3 there will be two zero checks between each zero span check This value may be set from 1 to 10 with 1 as default e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Ratio ENET ned Peene ETEO Sei i hie Instrument Co ntrols The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items The software M enu controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Ozonator The Ozonator screen is used to turn the internal ozonator on or off The display shows the status of the control line that turns the ozonator on or off The next lin
247. pan offset screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check gt Max Offset Zero and Span Auto The Zero and Span Auto Calibration screens read only allow the user to Calibration view the status of the most recent auto background or span calibrations The zero and span auto calibration screens are visible only if the auto calibration option is enabled and the instrument is in manual single gas mode The zero and span auto calibration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Autocal NO N02 NO NHs and The Concentration alarm screens display the current NO NO NO N Concentration NH and N concentrations and set the minimum and maximum alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max NO NO NO NH 3 70 and N Concentration Limits Min Trigger Model 177 Instruction Manual limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 100000 ppb 0 to 100 ppm and 0 to 150000 pg m 0 to 150 mg m The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the NO concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu The NO2 NO
248. placements cocacc tuner caet dantauddatcetel eeatantns 7 47 Measurement Interface Board Replacement ssns 7 48 Flow Pranedicer Replacement ce acne atta ace cate ttase 7 49 Flow Transducer Calibration s cciisineeascsia deen ani 7 50 Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement e eee 7 52 Converter Interface Board Replacement sicctessazesctstnccxediinecstitaiecced 7 52 Front Panel Board Replacement s0usc on eta ca eee coheed 7 54 LCD Module Replacement xtc cacccrtucs Sean lecant tote Lege te aang tacete ce ecaear ee 7 55 Service Locations aot aens e ea EETAS 7 56 System Description sssssssssssssssnnnnssssusnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnneunnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 8 1 H rdware ete taea sai nteiies te An E A E N R 8 1 NOwt0 NO C verterce snra ehanen n naia aaa 8 3 Mode Solenoid isinne asn Ea AT EE NE 8 3 NH Gonvert r oinen o en EEE r i oA R Ta Aia 8 3 Reaction Chamber sisstin ieissar iine ai ENKE S 8 4 Optical Filterer Tena E K tie eS Dye E A ER 8 4 Pressure l ASE IGEN jth ory Bevan dface the hirna ia gea a Sus tds 8 4 Sample Flow Sensoa sitet iste ete atta ic cites a J eae tN 8 4 ZONES Ci vasatatoindonatuaas Usted sodittaaitdude ad tuts Dues nsavtel bokid N 8 4 Qzonator Flow Switch i4 us inci dha ene 8 4 Phoromiultiplier Dibe stata 5 2ct atioccaeece netii 8 4 Photomultiplier Tube Cooler 2 34 esa ee Selec eee eas 8 4 External Pier py se tee Seah cheese Go gee er ce eset eee a 8 5 Diy Am Cail ab ye sa
249. ple Flow ozfl Ozonator Flow pres Pressure erec format lrec format srec format These commands report the output format for long and short records and dynamic data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The example below shows the output format for long records is ASCII with text according to Table B 4 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 01 set erec format format set lrec format format set srec format format These commands set the output format for long and short records and dynamic data according to Table B 4 The example below sets the long record output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Table B 4 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data erec layout lrec layout srec layout B 24 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the erec lrec srec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s 1x f SF SF f f f SE f SE f f Bt f t D L FFFFFFFFFFFFF flags no no2 nox nh3 nt intt pmtt convt cvext pres pmtv smplf lrec mem size srec mem size
250. plenish the ozonator air drying column as in the standard instrument A 5 10 micron pore size two inch diameter Teflon element is available for the Model 172 This filter should be installed just prior to the SAMPLE bulkhead When using a filter all calibrations and span checks must be performed through the filter The ozone particulate filter minimizes the potential for contamination of the ozonator by trapping any particulate matter before passing through the ozonator The I O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board Refer to Terminal Board PCB Assemblies in the Installation chapter for information on attaching the cable to the connector board For associated part numbers refer to the Servicing chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Terminal Block and Thermo Fisher Scientific Cable Kits Cables Optional Equipment Terminal Block and Cable Kits The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for ei
251. ponds with can t wrong settings The example below reports that the NO calibration gas is 40 0 ppb Send cal gas no Receive cal gas no 0 040E 04 ppb set no cal gas value set no2 cal gas value set nox gas value set high no gas value set nox cal gas value set nh3 cal gas value set nt cal gas value set cal gas no value set cal gas no2 value set high no2 gas value set high nox gas value set high nh3 gas value set high nt gas value set low no gas value set cal gas nox value set cal gas nh3 value set cal gas nt value set no gas value set no2 gas value These commands set the NO NO2 NOx NH3 and N span gas concentrations used by the auto calibration routine to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in current selected units The gas units are the same as those chosen by the user The example below sets the NO calibration gas to 810 0 ppb set low no2 gas value set low nox gas value set low nh3 gas value set low nt gas value Thermo Fisher Scientific Keys Display Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display Send set cal gas no 810 0 Receive set cal gas no 810 0 ok bkg no bkg nox bkg nt no bkg nox bkg These commands report the current NO NO and N backgrounds The example below reports that the NO background is 5 5 ppb Send bkg no Receive bkg no 5 5 ppb set bkg no value set bkg nox value set bkg nt value set no bkg va
252. ports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 28 temp comp tc Reports sets temperature compensation on or off B 37 time Reports sets current time 24 hour time B 40 up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 31 zero Sets zero span valves to zero mode B 36 zero gas Sets zero span valves to zero gas mode B 36 avg time high avg time low avg time avg 1 time high range avg 2 time low range These commands report the averaging time in seconds when operating in single range or averaging time used with the high and low ranges when operating in dual or auto range mode The example below shows that the averaging time is 300 seconds according to Table B 2 Send Receive avg time avg time 11 300 sec Model 177 Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements B 12 Model 17i Instruction Manual set avg time selection set high avg time selection set low avg time selection set avg 1 time high range selection set avg 2 time low range selection These commands set the averaging time high and low averaging times according to Table B 2 The example below sets the low range averaging time to 120 seconds Send set low avg time 8 Receive set low avg time 8 ok Table B 2 Averaging Times Selection Time NO Measure Mode Time NO NO N Measure NO Measure or N Measure Mode Mode 0 1 seconds 1 2 2 5 3 10 10 seconds 4 20 20 5 30 30 6 60 60 7 90 90 8 120
253. processor for use in calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature The voltage across the thermistor is also compared to a set point voltage and used to control that the reaction chamber heaters to maintain a constant temperature of 50 C Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermistor The converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple signal and fed back to the main processor to be used to display and control the converter temperature The temperature control board receives control signals from the main processor software to control the converter heater to the desired set point Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults Model 17 Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description Electronics Converter Temperature Control Board PMT Power Supply Assembly Input Board Assembly Digital Output Board 8 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual The converter temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the capillary block and NH converter The temperature is measured with a thermistor The voltage across the thermistor is fed to the converter processor for use in calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature The voltage across the thermistor is also compared to a set point voltage and used to control that the capillary block heaters to maintain a constant temperature of 50
254. ptional Equipment When operating in dual or auto range mode two sets of coefficients are used to calculate the NO NO2 NOx NH3 and N High and Low concentrations Also two averaging times are used one for each range The title bar indicates which range concentrations are displayed The words LOW RANGE CONCENTRATION on the top of the display indicates that the low concentration is displayed In dual range mode pressing the Jand arrows will toggle between high and low concentrations The example below shows the Run screen in single range mode 3 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Software Overview Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration appears above the main menu and submenus in every screen The SERVICE menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use t Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to select a choice e Press to return to the Main Menu or _ gt to return to the Run screen Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Range Menu Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units NO NO NO NH3 N ranges and to set the custom ranges The s
255. put configuration the default selections my not apply A In the dual range mode while in NO NO N mode there are two independent NO analog outputs and two independent NH analog outputs These are labeled simply as the High Range and the Low Range Each channel has its own analog output range averaging time and span coefficient This enables the sample concentration reading to be sent to the analog outputs at two different ranges For example the low NO analog output can be set to output concentrations from 0 to 50 ppb and the high NOx analog output set to output concentrations from 0 to 500 ppb Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu In addition to each channel having two ranges each channel has two span coefficients There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another For example the low NO range is set to 0 50 ppb and the high NO range is set to 0O 20 000 ppb By default in the dual range mode the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 5 See Table 3 3 for channels and pin connections Dual range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 72 oTololeTololelelelelelolelolelololo lelolololololelolelolelelelelelelels Figure 3 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode Table 3 3 Defaul
256. r Pin oOo ao N O wo A Signal Description NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN NC RS232 RS489 B oOo aoa N on A WW N NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC IN PJ1 w N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR PJ2 w nh AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC INTF BD PJ3 AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator DATA IPJ8 1 Ground 2 RS485 from Motherboard 3 RS485 from Motherboard PRES MJ3 1 Pressure Sensor Input 2 Ground 6 16 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 15V 15V INPUT BD MJ8 Oo o N oon A wo N gt x oO 15V Ground 15V 5V Ground Measurement Frequency Output Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage SPI Output SPI Clock SPI Board Select AMB TEMP MJ9 N e Ambient Temperature Thermistor Ground HVPS MJ10 YN oo mn Aa O N HV Power Supply Voltage Adjust Ground HV Power Supply On Off Ground HV Power Supply Voltage Monitor Ground Ground FLOW SW MJ14 wo nh NC Ground Ozona
257. r Assembly Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator assembly Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Ozonator assembly Wrench 5 8 inch Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 7 28 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ozonator Assembly Replacement 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Carefully disconnect the plumbing at the glass inlet and outlet of the ozonator 3 Disconnect the stainless steel tubing from the flow transducer 4 Loosen the four captive screws securing the ozonator bracket to the floor plate Flow Transducer Captive Screws 4 Ozonator Assembly Top View Ozonator Bracket Screws 2 Ozonator Ozonator Transformer Screws 4 Ozonator Assembly Front View Figure 7 15 Replacing the Ozonator Assembly 5 Remove the two screws securing the ozonator to the ozonator bracket Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Ozonator Transformer Repla
258. r Scientific Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Contents Exte ded Ranges anae R NA 3 82 Dilution Rato sieniin iness is piiois anasa ATENA E E ERSEN 3 83 Display Pixel Test ninii eieae ai cai ented Ea 3 83 Restore User Defaults aissis ienai isiiisiei 3 83 Password Menu nero honani a ieee Sie e a net 3 84 Set Passworde danna a ta NG a N ae Gs 3 84 Lock Instrument occnannie aan tiara a a a a 3 84 Change Password ocine o san teros e nRa Eaa AEEA EROA Aet ia 3 85 Remove Password issiria iaasa EnaA N EEEE ENE 3 85 Unlock Instr ments snieni iiaii 3 85 Calibrations ii 4 1 Equipment Required ssssssesssseeeeeeestetetetststsrsrsrsrsrstsrsrsestststneseseseseses 4 1 Zero Gas Generatorni a A RE EN AAAA RN 4 2 Compresso Ma a a e e E a A E E A ES 4 2 PIT e er Pc E ATE EE A a ia 4 2 Oxidation teia E E E A 4 2 Gri Dt inean inet acaced do teks ce celta ates hal cect hed neat is 4 2 Gas Phase Vittatots accsisigcdacilecey Haccslitec eet avian 4 3 Flow Controllers pciiini ha ie 4 3 Press re Regulator trn aanas e a NEA 4 3 Ozone Generator reerde siin e E TE E AE aS 4 4 Diverter Vayan re a E aR A AA RO 4 4 Reaction Chamber si sssiehosiasseisnasnchesxpnialvangd ssiiuaniacsteansindtuapiaeNlGe 4 4 Miang Chamberen aia at oi A aE Etpa 4 4 Output Manifold ssinianissenii nia weal ieeued 4 4 Reagents oen ae ar E pe E EEE T E PE 4 4 NO Concentration Standard cca Nene ta tee centennial 4 4 Assaying a Working NO Standard Against a NIST traceable NO Standatd nss in
259. r more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration SHRED CHET tic mf Bast ade mid reo bet i mri The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of the input board A D stages per the following procedure Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this screen A 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Manual Input Calibration 2 Press to leave warning screen 3 Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1 4 Use Jand gt to change the gain between 10 and 100 5 Use _ Jand to increment or decrement the D A counts so the frequency at gain 100 is equal to the frequency at gain 1 6 Press to save new input board calibration Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Service Menu Cu Citra ii rip tiers iL Pai i He oa Automatic Input Calibration The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to do an automatic calibration of the input board A D stages A message will be displayed after the optimum setting has been determined Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Automatic Input Calibration e Press to leave warning scre
260. r replacing the input board use the following procedure to calibrate the input board WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A 1 Erom the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt _nress gt C4 Ji scroll to Input Board Calibration gt and press Le The Input Board Calibration screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Input Board Calibration screen press to select Manual Input Cal and press to calibrate The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1 3 Make a note of the FREQ value displayed at GAIN 1 then press or gt to change the GAIN to 100 4 At the GAIN 100 screen use t to increment the D A counts until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above within 50 counts the value noted in the previous step 5 Press to store the value The screen flashes Calculating Please Wait and Done Values Saved messages Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply Figure 7 17 Equipment Required DC power supply Philips screwdriver Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Testing Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn wh
261. re that any particulate accumulation between the fins has been removed 5 If necessary use a small brush to remove residual particulate accumulation 6 Replace the cover 7 Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filters l Remove the two fan guards from the fans on the back of the analyzer and the one fan guard from the fan on the back of the converter and remove the filters Flush the filters with warm water and let dry a clean oil free purge will help the drying process or blow the filters clean with compressed air Thermo Fisher Scientific Pump Rebuilding Thermo Fisher Scientific A Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 3 Re install the filters and fan guards Mounting Screws 4 L ON J Filter pA a wY A AN Fan Guard Figure 5 3 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters Use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5 4 To replace the pump see Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter Equipment Required Pump Repair Kit two repair kits required per pump Allen Wrench 3 mm and 4 mm Wrench 9 16 inch Needlenose Pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing
262. rection of any slight bend 5 Lay the replacement reed valves in place center bowed out see valve installation and tighten the pan head screw both washers and the nut Be certain that the reed valves lay straight and smooth with Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement clearance from the recessed edge to prevent sticking If a reed valve curves away from the valve hole remove the screw flip the valve over and reinstall 6 Match the holes of the PTFE head gasket V with the head seal surface install the head lid and tighten the two center bolts with M4 lock washers first and then cross alternate tightening of the perimeter bolts Re tighten the two center bolts after the other bolts are tight Head Lid Screws Head Screws N Go and Washers C s Clamping Ll Disc Oty 3 Layered a f Diaphragms See detail f j Compressor Housing 3 Layer Diaphragm Installation Detail Connecting Rod Disc Important Install with ridges up as shown Dia ph ragm Connecting Transl i Rod ranslucent Diaphragm top p Installation ae T White Diaphragm center weight Nee Ne White Diaphragm bottom Housing a a Cover gt Upper Valve Under Valve Installation Bottom View of Headplate HEAD ORIENTATION MAY DIFFER FROM ABOVE Figure 7 6 Vacuum Pump Head Plate and
263. requested ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of 0xFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Request Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 IIlegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 17 Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Hex Function 05 Output Address Hi 00 Output Address Lo 05 Output Value Hi FF Output Value Lo 00 Response Field Name Hex Function 05 Output Address Hi 00 Output Address Lo 05 Output Value Hi FF Output Value Lo 00 The following Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS parameters supported for the Model 17i Table C1 Read Coils for 177 Coil Number Status 1 AUTORANGE 2 LOCAL REMOTE 3 SERVICE 4 UNITS 5 ZERO MODE
264. ro calibration The background signal is the combination of electrical offsets PMT dark current and trace substances undergoing chemiluminescence For more detailed information see Calibrate NO NOx and Nt Backgrounds in the Operation chapter The NO NO and N background screens operate the same way therefore the following procedure also applies to the NOx and N background screens For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures see the Operation chapter a Introduce zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead of the converter module and allow the analyzer to sample zero air until the NO NO N NO2 and NH responses stabilize When the responses stabilize from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate NO Background Press to set the NO background to zero Press to return to the Calibration menu and repeat steps b through d selecting Cal NOx Background to set the NO background to zero and Cal Nt Background to set the N background to zero Record the stable zero air responses as Zno ZNox ZN ZNo2 and Znu3 recorder response percent scale Note The NO channel should be calibrated first and then calibrate the NO channel then the N channel a CalibrateNO 2 Calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas a b Disconnect the source of zero air from the SAMPLE bulkhead In its place connect a source of NO calibration gas of ab
265. rt 50 Appendix F The calibration technique is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O which produces stoichiometric quantities of NO in accordance with the reaction NO 0 gt NO 0 The quantitative nature of this reaction is such that when the NO concentration is known the concentration of NO can be determined Ozone is added to excess NO in a dynamic calibration system and the NO channel of the chemiluminescence NH analyzer is used as an indicator of changes in NO concentration When O is added the decrease in NO concentration observed on the calibrated NO channel is equivalent to the concentration of NO2 produced Adding variable amounts of O from a stable O generator can change the amount of NO generated The following sections discuss the required apparatus and procedures for calibrating the instrument e Equipment Required on page 4 1 e Pre Calibration on page 4 9 e Calibration on page 4 10 e Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode on page 4 17 e Zero and Span Check on page 4 18 The following equipment is required to calibrate the analyzer e Zero gas generator e Gas phase titrator Model 177 Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Equipment Required Zero Gas Generator A zero air source such as a Thermo Scientific Model 111 Zero Air Supply or Model 1160 Zero Air Supply free of contaminants such as NO and Os is required for dilution calibration and ga
266. rter heater Replace with good PCB Analog signal doesn t match expected value Software has not been configured Recorder is loading down output Verify that the selected analog output has been properly configured to match the data system Verify that the recorder or data logger input impedance meets minimum requirements Model 17 Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Malfunction Possible Cause Action Flow meter fluctuations Dirty pump Clean or replace pump diaphragm diaphragm Capillary blocked Clean or replace capillary Clogged sample line Inspect all sample lines Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Possible Cause Alarm Internal Temp Check fan operation Check fan filter Action Replace fan if not operating properly Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check 10K thermistor on measurement interface board replace if bad Alarm Chamber Temp Chamber temperature below set point of 50 C Heater has failed Check 10K ohm thermistor replace if bad Check temperature control board to insure the LEDs are coming on If not temperature control board could be defective Check connector pins for continuity Alarm Capillary Temp Capillary block inside external converter box below set point of 50 C Heater has failed Check 10K ohm thermistor replace if bad
267. rth ground A Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges A Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source This can permanently damage the tube A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module a The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Mode Replacement Parts List 7 4 Model 17 Instruction Manual Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module a D A Pa 4 B Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service Menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 At the Main Menu press ED o scroll to Instrument Conteale gt press Jiesctoll 6 Service Modes and press Le The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON
268. s Pb ieee EE i Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and normal operation The example below shows the selected output state ALL is set to normal e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 BE CHS mTOR gH piei EN EOEE EPak Boue PEOP aad hat h POE ae e Pi EE F Instrument Configuration The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configuration of the instrument 3 60 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contact Information Alarms Menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing on the item will toggle it yes or no with the exception of some items such as dilution and auto calibration which may only be enabled at the factory A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information EHO Gere The alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to ei
269. s Menu Min and Max Flow Limits Ozonator Flow Zero and Span Check 3 68 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum sample flow alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow gt Min or Max DH vided Piet The Ozonator Flow screen read only is used to display the ozonator flow readings If the ozonator flow reading is 0 050 LPM 50 cc or below an alarm is activated and an alarm condition screen appears as LOW If the ozonator flow is above 0 050 the no alarm condition screen is displayed indicating that the flow is acceptable Inadequate ozonator flow will cause the ozonator to overheat resulting in permanent damage to the ozonator e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Ozonator Flow EH vided Piet The Zero and Span Check screens allow the user to view the status of the most recent zero span checks and set the maximum check offsets The zero and span check screens are visible only if the zero span check option is enabled and the instrument is in manual single gas mode The zero and span check screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check Max Zero and Span Offset The Max Zero and Span Check Offset screens are used to change the maximum check offsets The maximum zero and s
270. s Mode e Span Gas Mode e Set Background e Cal to low span e Cal to high span e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in firmware Serial Ports Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e Modbus Slave e Geysitech Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer data logger or PC RS 232 Connection A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM Compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 7 or 8 dat
271. s and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 17i Cables Part Number Description 101349 00 AC Power Cable 115VAC US 8926 AC Power Cable 220VAC EU 103299 00 Umbilical cord between analyzer and converter 101036 00 DC Power Supply 24V Output 101037 00 115VAC Supply to Interface Board 101048 00 RS 485 Data 7 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific External Device Connection Components Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 101038 00 AC Power Switch to Motherboard 01364 00 DC Power Supply Status Monitor 01054 00 Motherboard to Front Panel Board 01035 00 DC Power Supply AC Input 01033 00 AC from Receptacle 101377 00 AC to Power Switch 101267 00 Fan Power Cable 01346 00 Temperature Control analyzer and converter 01355 00 Signal Output Ribbon 01050 00 Heater Power 01055 00 Main AC Receptacle Assembly 102057 00 AC to External Pump 103399 00 NH3 Converter AC Power from front panel switch to temp control board in 115V version 101038 00 NH Converter AC Power from front panel switch to transformer in 220V version 103694 00 NH Converter AC Power from transformer to temp control board in 220V version Table 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and data loggers to an iSeries instrument Table 7 3
272. s in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte count 1 Byte N Output Status n Byte N N or N N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value 0xCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to r
273. s phase titration Compression The zero air source should be at an elevated pressure to allow accurate and reproducible flow control and to aid in subsequent operations such as drying oxidation and scrubbing An air compressor that gives an output of 10 psig is usually sufficient for most applications Drying Several drying methods are available Passing the compressed air through a bed of silica gel using a heatless air dryer or removing water vapor with a permeation dryer are three possible approaches Oxidation NO is usually oxidized to NO in order to ease its scrubbing Oxidation can be accomplished by either ozonation or chemical contact During ozonation the air is passed through an ozone generator The O that is produced reacts with the NO to form NO gt Care must be taken to allow sufficient residence time for the ozonation reaction to go to completion Chemical oxidation is accomplished by passing the air stream through a reacting bed Such agents as CrO on an alumina support or Purafil are very efficient at oxidizing NO to NO2 The chemical contact approach has the advantage of needing no electrical power input for its application Scrubbing Fixed bed reactors are commonly used in the last step of zero air generation to remove the remaining contaminants by either further reaction or absorption Table 4 1 lists materials that can be effective in removing contaminants Table 4 1 Scrubbing Materials To Remove Use
274. s the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input If a is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field This is not currently used Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line n This is a single blank line Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition NO 35 n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed
275. se Assembly o i Figure 7 9 Replacing the PMT Model 17 Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement 7 20 A PMT High Voltage Power S upply Replacement Model 17 Instruction Manual A 4 Remove the three retaining screws holding PMT base assembly to the cooler using a 5 16 inch nut driver Equipment Damage Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source This can permanently damage the tube A 5 Pull the PMT and PMT base from cooler assembly by twisting it slightly back and forth 6 To install PMT follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to replacing the PMT 7 Perform a photomultiplier tube calibration See PMT Voltage Adjustment in the Operation chapter Use the following procedure to replace the PMT high voltage power supply Figure 7 10 Equipment Required PMT high voltage power supply Nut driver 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the two PMT high voltage supply cables 3 Loosen the two retaining screws securing the assembly bracket to the floor plate and slide the assembly towards the
276. selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration for the new label Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Software Overview Software Overview 3 4 Model 17 Instruction Manual Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A The Model 172 utilizes the menu driven software as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen is the normal operating screen It displays the NO NO2 NO NHs and N concentrations depending on operating mode From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each submenu contains related instrument settings This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Software Overview syne
277. sesisesrererseseses 3 42 vi Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Logic States nsc n an g a AE 3 42 Instrument Staten aaa a E EEA 3 42 ATAENIS ecetes ie stn Son iret vas r e ante EE ntact weakgors 3 43 Non AlaiM sts sctesssssesiaussinnsaseiintisunsacd cen anie 3 44 Digital Tiput Settings sensn easel N Cees 3 44 Logig Stale i a r aA AANT ARAA SS 3 44 T str ment Actio hesin eniin naian e a 3 45 Analog Output Configuration esesssessseseseseseseseresrsrrrrrrerererersres 3 45 Select Output Range ssesesesesesesesesesesesesesesrsrsrsrsrsrsrererereereesrsesrees 3 46 Minimum and Maximum Value ssssesssesesesessesssssesssrereessesesesses 3 46 Choose Signal to Output s ssssssssessssssssssssssssssssesrsrsesesesesesesesesesese 3 48 Analog Input Configuration s sssesesssssssssserssersrsesrsrseseeesesesesesese 3 49 Desiri pTO An ROR NER A AR a Et 3 50 Utsaha a a a ai 3 50 Decimal Pl Esiri nia a A EES 3 51 Number of Table Points sss ssesesessesesrssssssrerrreresesesrrsrsrereereesesess 3 51 Table Pointiin N a a a 3 51 E EE A TA E ca tacat ieee cece 3 52 User Valde ta Sie a teeta O O E 3 52 Temperature COomMpensation ssessesessssesesesrerestsrssesesterestsrereseseeeeee 3 53 Pressure Compensation smdvssrtisnjaorionssscdoss ssdehvbags ionthantnnntvunceneeapeandy 3 53 Screen C ntrast anoni ia a tends agra E E N 3 54 Service Moder shrann A RE eae os ee Ten 3 54 Date Time iati eaii a a o aia 3 55 Diagnostics
278. shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Select Field gt Analog Inputs The Commit Content screen is used to save the selected output signal that is tied to the selected field item If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Commit Content Reset to Default Content 3 32 Model 17 Instruction Manual DH pirri To pH riimi F H MiL miimi i The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging field items to default values For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Configure Datalogging Logging Period Min Memory Allocation Percent Thermo Fisher Scientific The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently sele
279. sists of four numbers 9 ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive addr gw 192 168 1 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of 9 four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr gw 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 192 168 1 15 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four lt a gt numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Model 17 Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 42 Model 17 Instruction Manual Send set addr ip 192 168 1 15 Receive set addr ip 192 168 1 15 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 255 0 set addr nm address This command sets the nm address where address consists of four numbers 9 ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr nm 255 255 255 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 255 0 ok baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The example below reports that the current baud rate is 9600 baud
280. sssssseseeseeesesesreresesresess 3 21 Calibrate NO NO2 NO NH3 and N Coefficients cee 3 22 Model 17 Instruction Manual v Contents Zerol Satis HECK cea asia ca aude hate test cartance tutes ENN 3 22 Next TIME iren eaa e aA R a A 3 23 Period FLO UTS oreinen a oe eshi aan aiara ieai 3 23 Zero Span Purge Duration Minutes s sscsectssasssceccssndcantsnnsserssess 3 24 Zero Span Avy r ging TiM senscion erei 3 24 Zero Span Ratio snn anere a aA AAN 3 24 Instrument Controls Menu ssssseeseeeesesesisrsesisisisesisesesesesrsrsses 3 25 OZONA T saoe iae airen o enee a n deon a aA AS E E EaR 3 25 PMT Supply sisticcesctyerterlacslntaiettiaeiaperetlaeanaitel eacninaes 3 26 Auto Manual MOdGccncesiaeece canis tie ciageecatnsheadccterei aatensieciotveda oebetoeds 3 26 Datal gging Settings ch cst ssa Pad lactone cart d tts ate atedd lace iS 3 27 Select SREGERE Granen anan a a 3 27 View Logged Data csc ie a cae aie ee era cated heeseh 3 28 Number of Records s cnc denned adichenanddiaanlenie 3 28 D teand Mine ae on eari Ae c pat os e E Saale tect rt RN 3 28 PASE Lop gironina a a A a A a a settee 3 29 Sele t Contento ant a i a e a Oe 3 29 Choose lten Types dienei eirees tues use decent areas sate a aR 3 30 ConcentrationSisi e a iaa E a e a utes 3 30 Other Measurements ssesessssssssssessssssssestssesesesesesreererrrereeerersrees 3 31 Analog INp ts insane a A i 3 32 ASOT ITE Content dern eon e E E A R S 3 32 Reset t Defa lt Con
281. st the LCD display The display pixel test is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 83 Operation Password Menu Password Menu Set Password Lock Instrument 3 84 Model 17 Instruction Manual The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface The items visible under the password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password to unlock the front panel The set password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users can not change any settings from the front panel The lock ins
282. stment screen is used to manually adjust the PMT supply voltage The PMT voltage adjustment screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt PMT Voltage Adjustment Range Mode Select The Range Mode Select screen is used to switch between the various range modes single dual and auto range The range mode select screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Range Mode Select Converter Set Temperature The Set Converter Temperature screen is used to change the converter set temperature The converter set temperature reading is updated every second The converter set temperature screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Converter Set Temperature 3 72 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu External Converter Set The External Co
283. t voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be software configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in software Model 177 Instruction Manual 8 11 System Description 1 0 Components Analog Current Outputs Optional Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Digital Relay Outputs Digital Inputs 8 12 Model 17 Instruction Manual The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs The optional I O Expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are software configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in software The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel w
284. t Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 NO Low Range 2 33 3 NO High Range 3 15 5 NH Low Range 4 34 7 NH High Range 5 17 g None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A 3 10 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Auto Range Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu While in the NO NO N mode the auto range mode switches the NOx and NH analog outputs between high and low ranges depending on the concentration level The high and low ranges are defined in the Range menu For example suppose the low range is set to 500 ppb and the high range is set to 1000 ppb Figure 3 6 Sample concentrations below 500 ppb are presented to the low ranges analog outputs and sample concentrations above 500 ppb are presented to the high ranges analog outputs When the low range is active the status output is at 0 volts When the high range is active the status output is at half of full scale When the high ranges are active the NH concentration must drop to 85 of the low NH range for the low ranges to become active In addition to each channel having two ranges each channel has two span coefficients There are two span coefficients so that each range can be
285. t Interface Board Replacement on page 7 48 e Flow Transducer Replacement on page 7 49 e Flow Transducer Calibration on page 7 50 e Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement on page 7 52 e Converter Interface Board Replacement on page 7 52 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 54 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 55 e Service Locations on page 7 56 7 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure Avoid contact with converter heated components A Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components amp Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch a grounded metal object before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at ea
286. t mode local set mode remote These commands set the instrument to local or remote mode The example below sets the instrument to the local mode Send set mode local Receive set mode local ok allow mode cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting which configures the instrument to either accept or ignore the set mode local or set mode remote commands The example below shows that the instrument is configured to ignore the instrument commands according to Table B 10 Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd O Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set allow mode cmd value This command configures the instrument to value where value is either accept or ignore the set mode local or set mode remote commands according to Table B 10 If the instrument is set to accept the set mode local will unlock the instrument and keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel and the set mode remote will lock the instrument and keypad cannot be used to make changes via front panel If the instrument is set to ignore the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted upon but will not change the instrument lock status The example below sets the instrument to accept the set mode local or set mode remote commands Note The instrument will always respond to the command
287. t out on this terminal board if more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required A 2 6 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail B See Detail A E Detail A Detail B Assembled Connector Figure 2 5 0 Terminal Board Views Table 2 1 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Analog 13 Power_Fail_NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power_Fail_COM 3 Analog2 15 Power_Fail_NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL_Input1 5 Analog3 17 TTL_Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL_Input3 7 Analog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TTL_Input5 10 Analog ground 22 TTL_Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL_Input7 12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Connecting External Devices D O Terminal Board Figure 2 6 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 2 identifies the connector pins and associated signals See Detail A See Detail B Detail A Detail B d Assembled Connector Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views Table 2 2 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Relay1_ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA 2 Relay1_Conta
288. ta both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the example below the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 V analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 13 Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 13 The example below sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 13 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined Model 17 Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 48 Model 177 Instruction Manual dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in oxff7f din channel This command reports the action assigned to input channel and the corresponding active state The example below reports the input 5 to
289. tan toistasataa eldest inte J dees desi E a ay 8 5 Ammonia Scrubber sissa erias nicked 8 5 SOREW ATG as lez hair Mn leSiee tbat tebe AE cbs cadet lasek sobeund eabeatseladeetesnea ss 8 5 Instrument Control j j2i2s g2s nts cieat accion adeno 8 5 Mo itorng Signals menora eee essen oun es tee 8 5 Measurement Calculations ssc ile ed ots eid ee ik 8 6 Output Communication is ac dscocscesssscvarivaidecssaveaaess seSeossseavedacddeccteey 8 6 PlCGtrO nics se kenenin eae ht r Aa To O yuan heh SES 8 7 Mothetboatd jase stevcensteyecietlnein delice taeennlaciagielincuce 8 7 External COMO CHO TS ses oinei heredigi otini aaie 8 7 Internal Connectors repiano hani R e lacs tne S 8 8 Measurement Interface Board s sssssesesesesesesessssssssrsrseersreessseseseresesese 8 8 Model 177 Instruction Manual xi Contents xii Chapter 9 Appendix A Appendix B Model 17 Instruction Manual Measurement Interface Board Connectors ecceseesceteeteeteeeeteenees 8 8 Converter Interface Board iii irseui dite tenuecetind Moperrseteeaen 8 8 Converter Interface Board Connectors sssesceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 8 9 Plow Sensor Assemibl ys3 csccoascsdsasanenicssvassvscosnatenssanteudcetasuseaunedes 8 9 Pressure Sensor Assembly ie saeco tircnanadh acres dadaleainis nensntanetades 8 9 Temperature Control Boards ts iii Geen eae ia eee Gad eas 8 9 Converter Temperature Control Board 2 0 0 esac ate 8 10 PMT Power Supply Assembly cc sca2iete cencscebe au
290. tanie caocnd td carters cok oem 7 25 Solenoid Valve Replacement vai 2iiteeciaivaccssciweeeesactnneieaectientes 7 27 Ozonator Assembly Replacement cz cc 0sedvieictetd oes teeie genet 7 28 Ozonator Transformer Replacenvents 22s cdeectelschestenacscetesaceeadeeacteber dues 7 30 Input Board Replacements tox inno terete i tea 7 30 Input Board ali bration bua silat Ses ie eae ee asst 7 32 DC Power Supply Replacement siisstactaeceteeietstninrendccniadenes 7 32 Analog Output Testing a s oka pede iced ied eh aE E S 7 33 Analog Output Calibration vssins cotwcsaccnaieianweeentiae 7 36 Analog Input Calibration geese aad ae at loa 7 37 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts ossee 7 37 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale oo ee eeseeeneeteeeees 7 37 Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement scssessseseeeeseeeeeeeeee 7 38 Pressure Transducer Calibranont sited cided one a aaa 7 39 Temperature Control Board Replacement cceeeseseesereeteeeeneeseeeees 7 41 dnenavistor Replacements aona ea feeb ahe yuu 7 41 Ambient Temperature Calibration as 205 ssa cis eG ee 7 42 F se Rep aCe mre Rit escheat ale Oi ne at a eee 7 43 Ammonia Scrubber Replacement 1 h2gccharedse etstceceeedereeeseeieneaies 7 44 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement cceeeeseeeeeereeee 7 45 Digital Output Board Replacemeniticcf2 00 c ccan ci leecenensedsecdiates 7 46 Motherboard Re
291. tatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A l Turn analyzer and converter OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with heated components Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature control board Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing NH3 Converter Replacement Top Housing Assembly Heater Assembly lt ______ Thermocouple Leads and Heater Connector Bottom Housing Assembly 0 P Captive Screws 4 8y Figure 7 12 NOQ to NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly 6 Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom half 7 Remove the converter cartridge heater assembly from the bottom housing assembly 8 Loosen the heater clamp pry heater apart no wider than necessary and remove the converter cartridge noting the proper orientation of heater wires and thermocouple probe 9 To replace converter follow previous steps in reverse Note Be sure to wrap the O converter tube snugly around the heater NH Converter Use the following procedure to replace the NH converter Figure 7 13 Replacement Equipment Required NH Converter Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 7 25 Serv
292. te Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel pen EHO pirori Pii irei i The Ozonator Safety screen is used to turn the ozonator safety feature on or off If the ozonator safety is turned off the ozonator will always be on even if the converter is not up to temperature The ozonator safety screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Ozonator Safety ip guid PIL e i The Extended Ranges screen is used to turn the extended ranges feature on or off The extended ranges screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Extended Ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific Dilution Ratio Display Pixel Test Restore User Defaults Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Dilution Ratio screen allows the user to view and set the dilution ratio Acceptable values are 1 500 1 The default is 1 1 When this value is set the dilution ratio is applied to all concentration measurements This screen is only accessible if the dilution ratio option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Dilution Ratio aa pe mh drs Py Tit Rri Taic l kid The Display Pixel Test is used to te
293. tent enonian sina eh eee ai 3 32 Configure Datalogging s sessesssserereseresrsrsreststsrrererseserersrsrsrentes 3 33 Logging Period Minnssonienisng hiring e RiR 3 33 Memory Allocation Percent ssic isstisvessavsvanessevadesesisesa rnsoudeasvensvtears 3 33 D ta Treatment aeavscesessh vadnustives satshyiteniceedd tonbehecel sea sepesinsueetedyedeasy 3 34 Communication SETH ES soulavccde di sixcurentesch intact east dude dewieseca tans 3 34 BAUR A Ge cess ahs tea hi aa th Na delat sata etch iat ek 3 35 Instr ment TID iss nna a a E EAE 3 35 Communication Protocol sseeeeeeeeeseesrsisisrserererissesesrsses 3 35 Streaming Data Configuration nccksi eteencteine ds catdetrceosee ate 3 36 Streaming Data Interval aj hcucianwiawiiiwatead Madde 3 36 Choose Item Signal ieies dats ieser eaae ai doe 3 37 COnCentratios sessenta eiaa radai ie eais 3 37 Other Measitteniciiten ns i a ceraten ue 3 38 Aria lop INPS s a e a GN 3 38 RS 232 RS 485 Selection sssessesesseseseseesesessesessetsesessesesrseeseses 3 39 TCP IP Settings ionat eE ay AA A A A R aS 3 39 Use DHCP csini nipe ksi an aE S 3 40 AD Ei a bu cD ae eee re A EE E ee on Re eee 3 40 IN CRNAs Ssss soe dla ace vandiec te heal ena ee he ore Secale dacs 3 40 Default Gateway ras Scones acacia cardi en a E scars tiaeaters ee 3 41 Host Name rsss sitenin i a oea e woah vavanud eal isai 3 41 l OConfieurations esiseinas eE E a aa 3 41 Output Relay Settings seeseeeseeeseeseeeesesssesssesesesesese
294. tep below Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 2 Unplug all connectors Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate reconnection 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop off the measurement interface board from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board Figure 7 24 Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Flow Transducer Replacement 4 To install the measurement interface board follow previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement bench 6 Calibrate the PMT voltage pressure transducer flow transducer input board and ambient temperature sensor as defined earlier in this chapter Mounting Studs 2 Mounting Screws 2 Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 24 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board Flow Transducer Use the following procedure to replace the flow transducer Figure 7 25 Replaceme nt Equipment Required Flow transducer Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the plumbing connections from the flow transducer Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection Thermo Fis
295. ter assembly It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard via the 15 pin connector on the rear panel Thermo Fisher Scientific Converter Interface Board Connectors Flow Sensor Assembly Pressure Sensor Assembly Temperature Control Thermo Fisher Scientific Board System Description Electronics Connectors located on the converter interface board include Data communication and 24V power supply input with the motherboard e Fan and solenoid outputs e Temperature control board e Flow and pressure sensors not used e Ambient temperature sensor not used The flow sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a flow transducer with input and output gas fittings The flow transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference across a precision orifice This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample gas in the measurement system The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a pressure transducer with a gas input fitting The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure The temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the reaction chamber and converter The reaction chamber temperature is measured with a thermistor The voltage across the thermistor is fed to the main
296. ters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Locations on page 6 27 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 1 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 9 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 11 e Service Locations on page 6 27 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Model 177 Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 2 Model 17 Instruction Manual Table 6 2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition See Alarms Menu in the Operation chapter for detailed information Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfu
297. the clamping disc Note Over tightening of the clamping disc will significantly reduce diaphragm life Tighten enough to avoid contact with the head Ifa significant amount of torque is required to tighten first re check to see if the threads are clear then check that the connection rod support disc H is properly seated on the connection rod Over torque of the clamping disc must never be a way to avoid contact with the head A 9 Remove the two temporary aligning screws and re install the heads on to the pump body The correct head bolt torque range is 20 30 inch pounds 10 Turn the counterweight M through at least one full revolution to check for smooth operation 11 Re install the housing cover and check the pump for correct performance Use the following procedure to replace the valve 1 With the head off the pump unscrew the socket head cap screws with M4 lock washers S to remove the head lid T and gasket V 2 Loosen the single pan head screw washers and nut P and remove the two stainless steel reed valves Q If necessary hold the nut in place with a nut driver 3 Lightly clean the valve seat area of debris or deposits with fine grade steel wool This area must be clean and smooth without pits or scratches Do not scratch the head plate Finish the cleaning with alcohol and then air dry the parts 4 Lay the two replacement reed valves on a flat surface to the di
298. then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 177 Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges
299. ther LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press e Items displayed are determined by the options installed The zero span check and auto calibration alarms are visible only if the zero span check or auto calibration options are enabled and the instrument is in manual single gas mode The motherboard status interface board status and I O Expansion board status if installed and external converter status indicate Model 17 Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Alarms Menu that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Internal Temperature The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 47 C If the internal temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum alarm limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp 3 62 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Op
300. ther the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Model 17 Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Cables 9 4 Model 17 Instruction Manual Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37
301. tics screens Check the response to a known span gas Check the source pressure Check zero span solenoids or other hardware to be sure that span gas is being delivered correctly Rebuild pump head Unplug power cord Clean or replace capillary Check that the PMT is on Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Faulty PMT or input board Analyzer not calibrated or calibrated improperly No ozone reaching the reaction chamber Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check that the PMT voltage is between 700 to 1200 volts Use input board test mode and verify signal on each range to isolate fault to either PMT or input board Replace faulty component If problem still exists check signal cables and replace measurement interface board Check that the calibration factors are within their proper limits Check the Instrument Control menu to see if the ozonator is ON If itis ON check dry air supply No response to sample gas Disconnected or defective input or high voltage supply Analyzer not calibrated Defective 15 volt Unplug power cord Check that cables are connected properly Check cable resistance Recalibrate Check supply voltages Replace power supply Calibration coefficient outside acceptable limits of 0 5 2 0 Bad span gas System leak Insufficient calibrator flow Verify quality of span gas
302. tion Calibration Factors Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Averaging Time ERED ak tes PP Tite J abe Lid Wi hid PS PPPS B ri Calibration Factors Calibration factors are used to correct the NO NO2 NO NH3 and N Menu concentrations readings that the instrument generates using its own internal calibration data The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors The screens below show the calibration factors menu in single mode and dual auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed Normally the instrument is calibrated automatically using the Calibration menu described in Calibration Menu later in this chapter However the instrument can also be calibrated manually using the Calibration Factors menu To manually calibrate the instrument see NO NOx and Nt Backgrounds and NO NO2 NOx NH3 and Nt Coefficients below for more information e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Calibration Factors Menu NO NO and Ni The NO NO and N background corrections are determined during zero g 8 Backgrounds calibration The NO background is the amount of signal read by the 3 18 Model 17 Instruction Manual analyzer in the NO channel while sampling zero air The NO background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NO
303. tion Equipment Required Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer 4 8 Model 17 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to connect the GPT apparatus to the analyzer 1 Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in Figure 4 1 2 Ensure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard such as a soap bubble meter or wet test meter All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg 3 Precautions should be taken to remove O and other contaminants from the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of calibration to avoid any conversion of NO to NO Failure to do so can cause significant errors in calibration This problem can be minimized by a Carefully evacuating the regulator after the regulator has been connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve b Thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO after opening the cylinder valve c Not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations unless absolutely necessary 4 Connect the analyzer sample bulkhead input to the output of the GPT system 5 Determine the GPT flow conditions required to meet the dynamic parameter specifications as indicated in Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator earlier in this chapter 6 Adjust the GPT diluent air and O generator air flows to obtain the flows determined in
304. tions For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International 7 56 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the software structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows e Hardware on page 8 1 e Software on page 8 5 e Electronics on page 8 7 e I O Components on page 8 11 Hardware Model 17 hardware components Figure 8 1 and Figure 8 2 include e NOsz to NO converter e Mode solenoid e NH converter e Reaction chamber e Optical filter e Pressure transducer e Sample flow sensor e Ozonator e Ozone flow switch e Photomultiplier tube e Photomultiplier tube cooler e External Pump e Dry air capillary e Ammonia scrubber Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description Hardware Converter Flow Reaction Transducer Chamber PMT Assembly ow Switch Temperature Control Board Capillary Pressure Transducer Input Board HVPS Fan Thermistor Measurement Interface Board 1 0 Expansion zim Board Opt Power Supply
305. tor Flow OK Switch FLOW TEMP CTRL Thermo Fisher Scientific MJ15 MJ17 o Aa WoO N gt oao A WO N Flow Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V Ground Bench Temperature Input Ground 15V Converter Heater On Off Converter Temperature Input Model 17i Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 18 Model 17 Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 6 15V_PWR OZONATOR 0J1 Ozonator Output A 2 Ozonator Output B 24V IN P1 24V 2 Ground AC PUMP PJ1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground FAN 1 PJ4 24V 2 Ground FAN 2 PJ5 24V 2 Ground AC IN PJ6 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground COOLER PJ7 1 Cooler Thermistor 2 Ground 3 15V_PWR 4 Cooler On Off Control AC TEMP PJ8 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground NO NOX SOL PJ9 24V 2 NO NOX Solenoid Control SAMPLE SOL PJ10 24V 2 Sample Solenoid Control Z S SOL PJ11 24V 2 Zero Span Solenoid Control SPARE1 SOL PJ12 24V 2 Spare 1 Solenoid Control SPARE2 SOL PJ13 24V 2 Spare 2 Solenoid Control PERM OVEN POJ1 Perm Oven Gas Thermistor THERM Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 Ground PERM OVEN POJ3 1 Perm Oven Heater On Off 2 15V_PWR 3 Perm Oven Thermistor 4 Ground Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pi
306. tput and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 a All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Table B 14 Default Output Assignment DtoA Function Single Range Dual Range Auto Range 1 Voltage Output NO Low NOx High Low NOx 2 Voltage Output NO High NO Range Status 3 Voltage Output NO Low NH3 High Low NH 4 Voltage Output NH3 High NH3 Range Status 5 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 6 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 7 Current Output NO Low NOx High Low NO 8 Current Output NO High NO Range Status 9 Current Output NO Low NH3 High Low NH3 10 Current Output NH3 High NH3 Range Status 11 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 12 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used list var aout list var dout list var din These commands report the list of index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode determined by single dual auto gas mode for analog output digital output and digital inputs The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp field index The example below reports the list of analog output index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable O none 1 no 2 no2 Model 17 Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protoco
307. tration calculated with low range B 12 coefficients low no2 coef Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low no2 coef 1 Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low no2 coef 2 Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low no2 gas Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration B 30 low nox Reports NO concentration calculated with low range B 12 coefficients low nox coef Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 29 low nox gas Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration B 30 low nt Reports N concentration calculated with low range B 12 coefficients low nt coef Reports sets low range N coefficient B 29 low nt gas Reports sets low range N span gas concentration B 30 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page low range nh3 Reports sets current NH3 low range B 33 low range no Reports sets current NO low range B 33 low range no2 Reports sets current NO low range B 33 low range nox Reports sets current NO low range B 33 low range nt Reports sets current N low range B 33 Ir Outputs long records in the format specified in the command B 22 Irec Outputs long records B 23 Irec format Reports sets output format for long records ASCII or binary B 24 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 24 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of long records that canbe stored
308. trols gt Screen Contrast Service Mode The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off The service mode locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 172 For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode 3 54 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Date Time Operation Diagnostics Menu The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time Diagnostics Menu Program Version Thermo Fisher Scientific The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics i mid The Program Version screen read only shows the version number of the program installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and program versi
309. trument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Change Password e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrument Change Password The Change Password is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Unlock Instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Unlock Instrument 3 86 Model 17 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Equipment Required Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 4 Calibration This chapter describes procedures for performing a multipoint calibration of the Model 172 The information described here is considered adequate to perform the calibration However if greater detail is desired the user is referred to the United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Pa
310. u press _ _ to scroll to Diagnostics gt press gt to scroll to Test Analog Outputs and press e The Test Analog Outputs screen appears Press o scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear 3 P t ll to the desired channel ponding to th panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Press to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 7 8 Servicing Analog Output Testing Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows Press to reset the analog outputs to normal Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections
311. un screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easily distinguish them from the operating screens To exit a help screen press _ J or to return to the previous screen or to return to the Run screen JC J up Down The four arrow pushbuttons t pat 4 Bae and gt Left Right move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions Soft Keys The Soft Keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function at any moment The function of the soft keys allows immediate access to the menu structure and most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and as the keys functions change this is indicated by user defined labels in the lower part of the display so that the user knows what the keys are to be used for 9 To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the
312. unit ppm Send set unit ppm Receive set unit ppm bad cmd The save and set save params commands stores parameters in FLASH It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Table B 1 lists the 177 C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 41 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 41 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 41 addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port B 41 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm capillary temp Reports sets capillary temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm capillary temp Reports sets capillary temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm chamber Reports sets chamber temperature alarm maximum value B 16 temp max alarm chamber Reports sets chamber temperature alarm minimum value B 16 temp min alarm conc nh3 max Reports sets current NH3 concentration alarm maximum B 16 value alarm conc nh3 min Reports sets current NH3 concentration alarm minimum valu
313. up Use the following procedure when starting the instrument 1 Plug the sample pump analyzer and converter modules into an appropriate AC outlet 2 Turn the analyzer module and the converter module ON 3 Allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize Note it is best to turn the ozonator on and let the instrument run overnight before calibration in order to obtain the most accurate information A 4 Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times to appropriate settings For more information about instrument parameters see the Operation chapter 5 Before beginning the actual monitoring perform a multipoint calibration as described in the Calibration chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17 Instruction Manual 2 11 Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display front panel pushbuttons and menu driven software For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Software Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 8 e Averaging Time on page 3 16 e Calibration Factors Menu on page 3 17 e Calibration Menu on page 3 20 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 25 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 55 e Alarms Menu on page 3 61 e Service Menu on page 3 71 e Password Menu on page 3 84 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample
314. utside the recommended temperature range When temperature compensation is on the display shows the current internal instrument temperature measured by a thermistor on the Interface board When temperature compensation is off the display shows the factory standard temperature of 30 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Temperature Compensation Pressure Compensation Pressure compensation provides compensation for any changes to the instrument s output signal due to reaction chamber pressure variations The effects of reaction chamber pressure changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any change in reaction chamber pressure When pressure compensation is on the first line of the display represents the current pressure in the reaction chamber When pressure compensation is off the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 100 mmHg e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pressure Compensation Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 177 Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Instrument Controls Menu pri ii Screen Contrast The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 100 in increments of 10 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Con
315. x NH and N concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt NO NO2 NOx NH3 or Nt Concentration ip priori Piet The Minimum Concentration alarm limit screens are used to change the minimum concentration alarm limits The minimum and maximum NO NO2 NO NHs and N concentration alarm limit screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Select Concentration gt Min or Max ip gies PLP The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the NO NO2 NOx NH and N concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Menu PMT Voltage Adjustment Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Select Concentration gt Min Trigger The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode To put the instrument into the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service The PMT Voltage Adju
316. yaq 129 48Sfp yesey 4209 N 07 y9 49 ueds o1 Z 4209 HN 07 4209 N 07 129 4809 ON 07 sns pg AUOD 1X9 J209 HN 07 129 Z 909 ON 07 A uo abuey oyny 10 jenq 104 snes pa dxa O I J909 ON 07 189 L 209 ON 07 snyers Pg Ul 4209 ON 07189 4909 ON 07 snes an 809 ON 07189 3209 N IH s uey wozsn9 19S 39u09 N 4909 N H 129 4909 HN H abuey N 07 32u09 HN 4209 HN IH 129 209 ON IH abuey N IH 9U09 XON 209 XON IH 189 Z 4809 ON IH ebuey HN 07 29u09 ON 4209 ON H 129 L 4809 ON IH e6uey HN H sunejeq 1SN 2401S8y 3u09 ON 209 ON IH Ieo 4809 ON IH a6uey XON 07 S21 1 X d Aejdsiq jeoojny ueds Byg N e2 6yg N abueyXOn H oney uonniiq leaoiny 013Z oju JeIU0D Byg ON 129 Byg ON buey ON 07 sabuey pepue xy yoay ueds ByuoD juewnssu 6J9 ON Ieo 5 q ON e6uey7ON H Ajayeg 10 euozO 49849 048Z syndjno Gojeuy S L w qd uey ON 07 1e9 Indu Boyeuy MO 4 10 2U0ZO savers Aejoy pow 8d1A8S s inejeq 129 18Sf JesSeYy aut Bay 07 e6uey ON H 129 ndino Boyeuy mold sinduy eub yses U09 uaal9S yoaug ueds o19Z 4209 N aw Gay IH spun sed 1eo dwa Ssunssald Byuog yu wnysu uoJesuad0g S id 4209 N 120 4909 HN 1e9 pg Ndu dw 1 nuog xa sabeyo Indu Bojeuy uo esu dwog dw Jop HN 18D 4309 ON s uey wojysny S led mold duel AUCD sfuipe y indul Bojeuy Byuo9 O I 4209 ON 129 Z 209 70N abuey N juewinajsu y2ojun ed
317. yte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2 x N N N or N Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register value Hi 10 Register value Lo 10 Register value Hi 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register value Lo 11 0x00 Register value Hi 12 0x00 Register value Lo 12 0x64 Register value Hi 13 0x00 Register value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The force write single coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The
318. yzer Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 17 Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 177 Instruction Manual e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert Description DANGER A hazard is present that will result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A WARNING A hazard is

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Documentation complète RubenDesign  20 G36 Sniper    Abridged user`s manual  DS3508 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide (p/n 72E  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file